JP7253826B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including:

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state in which the time for variable display of the above symbols is shortened (time-saving state), a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby giving a predetermined profit to the player. A game machine equipped with an advantageous game state has appeared (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136

By the way, there is a demand for higher amusement even in gaming machines equipped with advantageous game state functions.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which solves such problems and is equipped with a highly interesting and advantageous game state function.

The present invention provides a gaming machine as follows.
(I) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
Identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by fluctuation and stop of identification information;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a predetermined passage area arranged in the game area through which game media can pass;
a displacement member capable of being displaced between a first state in which guiding of game media is easy and a second state in which guiding of game media is more difficult than in the first state;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium has passed through the predetermined passage area;
a specific passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
The selection area is capable of causing a game medium that has passed through the specific passage area to pass through any one of a plurality of areas through which game media pass, including the first start area and the predetermined passage area,
The special game state includes a first game state in which a predetermined game capable of giving a profit to the player can be executed, and a second game state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times,
The special game state transition determining means, rather than determining that the transition to the first game state is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the first start region, is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second start region. There is a high probability of determining when moving to 1 game state,
The second starting region is capable of allowing a game medium to pass through when the game medium is guided by the displacement member being displaced to the first state ,
The displacement member has one of a plurality of displacement patterns including a predetermined displacement pattern and a specific displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state. can operate with
In the period in which the operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state , and the second state is displaced from the second state to the first state. It is possible to guide game media in substantially the same number as the plurality of times by performing the motion a plurality of times, and it is easier for the game media to pass through the second start region than during the period in which the motion according to the specific displacement pattern is possible,
When the displacement member is in the first state when moving to the second game state while operating in the predetermined displacement pattern, and when the displacement member is in the first state when moving to the second game state, the displacement member is capable of continuing the first state during the second game state,
A game machine characterized in that when the identification information is stopped in a mode of shifting to the second game state triggered by passage of the game medium into the first start area, control is possible so that the pending display is not displayed. .

(1) A game board having a game area in which game media can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting a game medium to the game area by a player's operation;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
a first displacement member disposed in the game area and displaceable between a first state in which game media are easily captured and a second state in which game media are difficult to capture in the special game state;
first identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by passage of the game medium into the first start area by fluctuation and stop of the first identification information;
second identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A second displacement disposed in the game area, capable of being displaced between a first state in which game media are easily captured and a second state in which game media are difficult to capture, and leading the captured game media to the second start area. a member;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the second displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
game state control means for switching a game state according to one of the stop display modes of the first identification information and the second identification information;
with
The game area has a left side area and a right side area that can be separated by the operation of the shooting means by the player,
The first starting area, the second starting area and the second displacement member are arranged in the left side area,
The passing area and the first displacement member are arranged in the left area,
The first displacement member is arranged downstream in the flow direction of the game medium with respect to the passage area,
The gaming machine, wherein the second displacement member is arranged downstream of the first displacement member in the direction in which the game medium flows, and only the game medium flowing down from the first displacement member side can pass through the second displacement member. .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with a highly interesting and advantageous game state function.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is viewed from the front and right obliquely upward. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the first pachinko game machine, comprising (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for low start and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for high start. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of abnormal state monitoring processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. It is a front view showing an example of the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is a front view schematically showing the main part of the internal configuration of the starting winning accessory unit 3150. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a sorting operation of game balls by a sorting device 3506; It is a front view showing the sorting operation of game balls by the sorting device 3506. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 when the sorting device 3506 sorts the game balls to the first operating mechanism 3511 side. It is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 when the sorting device 3506 sorts the game balls to the second operating mechanism 3512 side. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a fourth pachinko game machine. It is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 when winning the normal symbol lottery. Shows the state transition of the normal electric accessory 3146, the sorting device 3506, the second non-electric accessory operating switch 3515, the second non-electric accessory 3441, and the big winning opening 3131 for the big hit when the normal figure is won in the normal state It is a time chart. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the distribution apparatus control process in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the opening pattern setting process in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state at the time of small winning RUSH in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state at the end of the small hit RUSH in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 4th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of command analysis processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing when receiving a special symbol game end command in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in a 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state of the modification 1 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state of the modification 2 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state of the modification 3 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board unit of the modification 4 of the modification 4 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state of the modification 4 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing a variation pattern determination process in the fifth modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in the modification 5 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in the modification 5 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation screen in the modification 5 of the 5th pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of jackpot end processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game using the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state of the modification 1 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the game board unit according to the modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the special figure fluctuation at the time of entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) in the second modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine, or the special figure fluctuation that becomes a two-round normal jackpot. . It is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the game board unit according to the modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure and operation|movement of the rotating accessory 185 based on the modification 3 of the 6th pachinko game machine. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 7 in Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state in the modification 5 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state in the modification 6 of the 6th pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the game state in the modification 7 of the 6th pachinko game machine.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel. Also, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination process (Hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") results are finalized. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, the LED group 46 will be described. The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140A, 140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 145, a small win unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10.例文帳に追加Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and has an arcuate center rail 116 on the upper side. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 in the game area 105 is called the left area 106 , and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called the right area 107 . The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of and below the display area of the display device 7 . Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first 1 special symbol symbol random value, reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values of the first special symbol effect selection random value, etc.) is referred to as start information of the first special symbol. Storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension, and the starting information of the first special symbol that is suspended is also called "reserved ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the game area 105, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). . When a game ball enters the general winning opening 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right area 107, and includes a passing gate 126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 125 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

Also, the passage gate 126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), the accessory continuous actuating device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, until the start condition is satisfied, the storage of the starting information of the normal design is called suspension, and the starting information of the normal design that is suspended is also referred to as "suspended ball of the normal design".

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a big winning big winning hole 131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 131. , and the special electric accessory 133 are integrated. The special electric accessary product unit 130 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 105 and below the passage gate unit 125 .

The big winning opening 131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball is arranged, or a center accessory 115 is provided. A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for the special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big win, and to allow a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second starting opening, the second starting opening 140A and the second starting opening 140B are arranged in the game area 105, and these second starting openings 140A and 140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 140A and 140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 131, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the jackpot jackpot 131 and flows further downstream is sent to an upper flow path 107a or a lower flow path 107b by a branch peg 108 shown in FIG. 4, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a win the second starting port 140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured so that a prize can be won. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 107a but have not won the second starting port 140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the lower side of the flow-down path 107b, and includes a prize winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The normal electric accessory 146 includes a normal electric shutter 147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 148 that operates the normal electric shutter 147 (see FIG. 6 to be described later). The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the normal electric shutter 147 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 140B or is easily opened, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. Note that instead of the above-described general electric shutter 147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip, which is composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small winning unit 150 includes a small winning large winning opening 151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small winning large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). , a small-hit shutter 153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball into the small-hit large winning opening 151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 145 in the downward flow path 107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 146, even if the small winning big winning port 151 is open, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 151 for small winning because the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 131 for big winning and the big winning opening 151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(out port)
The out port 178 is any of various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting ports 140A and 140B, the big winning port 131 for big wins, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes outside the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 122, between the normal electric accessory unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, etc. A game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged outside the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance accessories 58 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165 and a second special symbol reservation display part 166 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is reached. Winning (passing) of the game ball becomes easy.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of variable display of the normally reserved symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved normal symbols") when the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved. There, it is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a including, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a made up of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is established, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually. Variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is established, the second special symbol display LED group 164a alternately or mutually repeats lighting and extinguishing. Variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (e.g., eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specified. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol reserved display unit displays the number of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the variable display of the special symbols is reserved. A first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 are provided.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. ``Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended'' means that the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judging the jackpot, random numbers for the design of the first special symbol, random numbers for the reach judgment of the first special design, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining the variation pattern of the first special design. Numeric value etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the 1st special design is satisfied. In addition, the condition for starting the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol pending display unit 165 displays the number of pending variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol pending display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the reserved number of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second Random numbers for jackpot determination of special symbols, random numbers for second special symbols, random numbers for reach determination of second special symbols, and random numbers for effect selection used when determining variation patterns for second special symbols, etc. Various random numbers, etc.) is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established. In addition, the condition for starting the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for progressing the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , second special symbol holding display portion 166, general electric solenoid 148, special electric solenoid 135, small hit solenoid 154, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first starter switch 121, second starter switches 141A and 141B, a passage gate switch 127, a big win win count switch 132 for big wins, a general win win switch 123 and a big win for small wins. A mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role product control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns are stored.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, referring to FIG. 7, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is shot by a user's operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120, 140A, and 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. . In addition, the normal symbol game, for example, executes the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and operates the normal electric accessory 146 to operate the winning opening (the second game in this embodiment) This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140B). In this specification, "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, normal symbol game and operation unit such as production button 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, if the game state is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state or the small win game state. do.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and the possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131 is increased. Relatively enhanced.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) to open. It will be in an open state, and the possibility of winning a prize to, for example, the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process that is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, and Special symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the fact that the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, are included.

When there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A, 140B, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is satisfied. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment, the high probability short working hours gaming state and the high probability non short working hours gaming state). On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to the variable probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, when it is a small hit, a small-hit game control process is performed.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and effect selection Various data such as various random numbers such as random numbers) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, during the period from when the special symbol starts winning to when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied, when the game ball enters (passes) the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B Based on the extracted starting information, pre-reading judgment is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not the "big hit" is won) and the variation pattern prior to the special pattern hit judging process. A production function may be provided. In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the start information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and an effect for performing a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) operates, and the game to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which winning (passing) of the ball is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140B), the control in which at least one of the electrical support control that increases the frequency of opening the opening 140B) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Execute.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, The pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random number value of the second special symbol, and the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range ( width) may be used, or a hard random number method may be used in which a random number is extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is executed is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 can select one of these gaming states. It is possible to progress the game in . However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, and low-probability short-time game state is progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 7, for example.

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are set using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both). Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (for example, normal game state and low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state and a high probability non-short-time gaming state). setting 3 is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72. Incidentally, although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the setting value, or may be a common probability for setting 1 to setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 9 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 9 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the big hit determination randomness acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B. This is a table referred to when a "big win", "minor win" or "losing" is determined by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are only "big hit" and "losing". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "big win", "minor win" and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, it is determined as a "big hit" or "losing" based on the extracted random number value for big hit determination. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1), the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be "loss" and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, it is determined as a "big hit", a "small hit" or a "lose" based on the extracted random number for big hit determination. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data and , the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding value data for judging a small hit, and the random number value for judging a big hit determined as a "losing" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 204, it is determined as a "big hit", and the hit/loss determination is performed. The value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

Also, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining the big hit is any one of 0 to 850, it is determined to be a "big hit", and the determination value data is " It is determined as “jackpot judgment value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 850, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

Similarly, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 204, it is determined as a "jackpot", and the determination value data is It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 205 to 22049, it is determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is not any of 0 to 22049, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

In addition, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining the big hit is any one of 0 to 850, it is determined to be a "big hit", and the determination value data is " It is determined as “jackpot judgment value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 851 to 22695, it is determined as a "small hit", and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining the big hit is not any of 0 to 22695, it is determined as "losing", and the determination value data is "losing". judgment value data”.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. It is a table referred to when selecting the "hit time selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, "z7" is selected as the winning symbol command. is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the design designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, by operating the small-hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6), the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "losing", the symbol selection command at the time of winning is not selected regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, and the symbol is specified. The command "zA7" is selected.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9), hit-loss determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10), a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a winning selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed to determine the hit/loss of special symbols, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the symbol designation command based on the extracted random number value for judging the big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol. good.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the variable probability flag, the number of times of variable probability, and the value of the time saving flag, according to the winning time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. , and the number of times of time saving, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "big win", the kind of big win is determined as follows. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time saving flag is OFF. In addition, when the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". In addition, when the winning selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". Furthermore, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the variable probability flag is OFF, the time saving flag is ON, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

Further, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "big win", the kind of big win is determined as follows. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time saving flag is OFF. Also, when the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation frequency is "10000", the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving frequency is "10000". Furthermore, when the winning time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the variable probability flag is OFF, the time saving flag is ON, and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 11 are just an example, and are not limited to these. When the value of the variable probability flag is determined to be "0", the variable probability number of times is not determined, but the variable probability number of times may be set to "0" in the sense that the variable probability control is not executed.

In addition, the probability variable number of times "10000" is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the big hit game state ends (that is, the next big hit). Continuously execute the probability variable control. It is the purpose that can be done.

[1-4-5. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 12 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine, comprising (A) a special symbol variation pattern table for low start, and (B) a special symbol variation pattern table for high start. is. It should be noted that the column of "details of presentation" in FIG. 12 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A, 140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design.

In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 12(A), for example.

On the other hand, in the gaming state where hitting to the right is recommended, that is, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the high-probability non-short-time gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbols for the high start shown in FIG. 12 (B) A variation pattern of special symbols is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12(A) and (B), the variation pattern of the special symbols includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection. Determined based on random values. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, compared with the case where the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start , The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 600000 msec (for example, long variation AC) and variable over a very long period of time. display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 301 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 12, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, for example, the high probability short time game state, the high probability short time game state or the low Although the variable pattern table of special symbols for high start is referred to in the fixed working hour game state, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39. FIG.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of backup clear switch 176 and setting key 174 are stored in the activation control flag area in main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (if determined as YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, when both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and when both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, and when either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

At S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). The details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, the processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6msec interrupt prohibition section (S26 ~ S35 processing section) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

[1-5-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the power failure recovery (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates setting change or setting confirmation (YES determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, special symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is kept for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect. The main special symbol will be explained in the sub-control process which will be described later.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S72), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process is moved to S73. For example, NO determination is made in S72 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

At S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S75), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 performs the process. is moved to S76. For example, NO determination is made in S75 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S75 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

At S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

At S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (when S78 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S79.

At S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

At S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

At S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (when S81 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the timing for starting variable display of the first special symbol is reached (when S81 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed, and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S82) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[1-5-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S73, S76, S79 and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that, for example, when the special symbol management process is invoked and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

At S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S93 based on the control state number read out in the process of S92.

At S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 . If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

At S95, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

At S96, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

At S97, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). It should be noted that the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called at S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S76, and returns the process to S77 when the special symbol management process is called at S79. If so, the process returns to S80, and if called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S93 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S93 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S101), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S101 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S102.

At S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S102 is NO determination ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, that it is on in S102 (NO determination in S102), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 causes the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S102 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. In addition, in the hit determination processing of the special symbol, first, the determination processing of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105.

At S105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result (for example, a big hit, a small hit or a loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S104). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of a big hit when the result of the special symbol hit judging process is, for example, a big win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the type of big win is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but the number of types of jackpots may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of big wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S104), the random number for reach determination or/and the random number for effect selection, etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12A), and the right-hand In the gaming state where hitting is recommended (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)) A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to it. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

At S108, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S107) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

At S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 20 S94) is performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

At S110, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

At S111, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, game state management processing (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S112)) is interrupt prohibited. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S94 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

At S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (NO in S123), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S123 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124.

At S124, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

At S125, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

At S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small win.

In S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (when S127 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S127 that the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small win (when S127 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

At S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big win.

In S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 of FIG. 21) is not a big hit (when S129 determines NO), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S129 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit (when S129 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

At S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S131), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (when S131 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

At S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the winning flag of the other special symbol to a losing flag and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing (see S104 in FIG. 21) of the special symbol to be processed is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

At S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

At S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

At S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

At S138, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

At S139, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. In addition, the other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. be. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S95 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S141), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S141 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S142, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in a stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, when it is determined in S142 that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the big win (if YES in S142), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a failure (NO determination in S143), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

At S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S143 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the big-hit game control process or the small-hit game control process. In this processing, signals to be output to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S146. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 131 or the big winning opening 151 for the small winning) (S147), the external terminal board 184 Big hit signal set processing (S148), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), game state designation parameter setting processing (S150), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S151 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S149) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 20 S96) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S161). Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

At S162, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S163). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S96 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of a big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S96 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

If it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S171), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S171 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (eg, the big winning opening 131 or the small winning opening 151) is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the jackpot jackpot 131 opened in the jackpot gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit big winning opening 151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S173 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S174.

At S174, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S174) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 20 S98) is performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S175.

At S175, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S173), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S177.

At S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened. After executing the process of S177, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S178.

At S178, the main CPU 201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. The big winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S179.

At S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning), maximum opening time of big winning opening, maximum number of winning openings to big winning opening, winning of big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when executing the big winning game control process, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 151 for small winnings when executing the small winning game control process. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S180.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 131 and the big winning opening 151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S180, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating open/close control data for the big winning openings (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S181.

At S181, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S181) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S97 in FIG. 20) is performed. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

At S182, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

At S183, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S97 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S191 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 152 for small winning (see FIG. 6) etc.) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

In S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening 151 for small winning) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (if YES determination in S192) ), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has passed.

When it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S193), the main CPU 201 determines that the big winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131, small winning opening 151) has passed (if YES in S193), the main CPU 201 The process moves to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (big winning big winning opening 131, small winning big winning opening 151). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

At S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S195) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

At S196, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

It should be noted that when this jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S98 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

If it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S201), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S201 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S202.

At S202, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening counter, large winning opening Winning counter, etc.) is set or reset. The special symbol pause flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

At S203, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the processing of S203, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing, terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 30 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S211), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the wait time for the normal symbol is 0 in S211 (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

At S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S213 based on the control state number read in the process of S212.

At S213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S213 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S214 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

At S215, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. The process of S215 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S216.

At S216, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. The process of S216 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. When the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S217 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 255, for example, and 0 to 255 is used as the normal symbol hit determination value data. Since the normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data with respect to the total random number of the winning determination random numbers of the normal symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbol is, for example, 255/256 in this embodiment. This normal per symbol probability is the same or substantially the same when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time such as 600 sec in a game state in which the time saving control is not executed, whereas in the game state in which the time saving control is executed a relatively short time such as 1 sec. only run. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 31, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

At S<b>222 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power interruption detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not power interruption is detected.

When it is determined in S223 that the power failure is not detected (when S223 determines NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined in S223 that the power failure has been detected (when S223 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 32, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S232). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S232), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

At S233, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S234), and shifts the process to S235.

At S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in a game permitted state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, power failure recovery, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (when S235 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. Details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

When the game is not permitted (when S235 determines NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S235 that the game is permitted (if determined as YES in S235), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a transmission reservation process of an effect control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

At S242, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S231, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed at S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S252). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the value of the startup control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S253 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S254). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of setting, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257. .

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S256.

At S256, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S252), setting confirmation process (S254), or initial setting process at startup (S25) is subordinated. It is sent to the control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 34, the setting change processing performed at S252 during the setting control processing (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S261). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S261), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S261), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S<b>262 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S263).

If it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S263), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S263), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S264.

At S264, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed at S253 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S272). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S264 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 17) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change, and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S281). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the processing of S282, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-5-20. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S272 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 17).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S291). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power cutoff, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. After executing the RAM setting process (S291) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S292 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO determination in S292), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S292 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S292 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the variable probability notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the processing of S294, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, switch input detection processing performed at S240 in the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring processing (S301). The details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S302, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol-related switch check processing. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

At S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . And, if the first starting port switch 121 or/and the second starting port switches 141A and 141B are ON, the transmission of the holding addition command of the starting information of the first special symbol and/or the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved. be. In this case, for example, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, a specific pending addition command is transmitted that can be identified as being pending for the execution of the look-ahead effect. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 . Then, if the prize ball-related switch is turned on, a prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring process]
Next, referring to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed at S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the abnormal condition monitoring process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring preprocessing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information of various sensors set in the input ports of the I/O port 205 is updated.) to

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality is performed for each of a plurality of monitoring items to be subjected to abnormality detection determination. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs induced magnetic field monitoring processing. In this process, it is determined whether or not the induced magnetic field is detected, and if the induced magnetic field is detected, the induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. After the process of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S321). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, etc.) for operating various effect devices. request, accessory request, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 . The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 . Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S328.

At S328, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role product request to the role product control circuit 307 . Based on the message (character request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the character control circuit 307 controls all or part of the character that constitutes the performance character group 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6). Drive control is performed to operate the performance drive motor (not shown). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

Although the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is recommended, and the game state in which right-handed hitting is recommended (high-probability short-time game state, high-probability non-short-time game state, low-probability In the time saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so the winning of game balls to the second start ports 140A and 140B Based on the second special symbol game is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a small hit rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency in which the second start opening 140B is in the open state in the high-probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small-hitting big winning opening 151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win the second starting port 140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)). The winning frequency of the game ball into the big winning opening 151 for winning is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability short working hours game state, low probability short working hours game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the second start port 140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 107b end up winning the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. Of the game balls distributed to the path 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Also, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is recommended, but if hitting to the right is performed, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passage gate 126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived. There is a possibility that the small winning large winning opening 151 is opened by the normal electric accessory 146 being operated and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 12(A)), provisionally, the second start ports 140A and 140B are used for the game. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[1-8. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 41, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big winning or big winning opening 151 for small winning (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. When the ball is paid out and the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (both see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out, and the general winning port When a game ball wins at 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko game machine. 44 is a table showing release triggers at , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 43), and remarks.

Note that the overview of errors shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 43 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors that are not shown in FIG. 43 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a large winning opening If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole 131 or the big winning hole 151 for small winning (see FIG. 4 for both), or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the big winning hole is entered. Abnormal ejection errors, vibration sensor errors when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined period of time, and the like correspond. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening 131 for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big hit game control is finished. In some cases, it is determined as an error when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball in the big winning prize opening 131, or when there is no game ball passing through the specific area. It is preferable to configure so as to

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, when the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) detects a winning prize before the first big win big winning hole 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened after the initial power is turned on, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) judges that an abnormal winning error has occurred, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, etc., the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a big winning opening abnormal winning error."
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output according to game states in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 44, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, different signals are output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) Signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are outputted during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the big win and during the small win).

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) (not shown)) can grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is sent.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high probability short time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high probability short time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is sent. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small winning game control process different from the signal output when the small winning game control process is not being performed, the small winning is achieved in the pachinko game machine to which the external information is transmitted. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed among the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. . Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the second pachinko machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the variable display of is suspended; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not in variable display, not in a jackpot game state, etc., and when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, etc.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and , that the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, is established when at least all are satisfied, and the starting condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are It is established when at least all of the conditions that variable display is not being performed, that the variable display of the second special pattern is suspended, and that the earliest suspension is the suspension of the variable display of the second special pattern are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 1010, a game area 1105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110. center accessory 1115, first starting port 1120, general prize winning port 1122, passage gate unit 1125, special electric accessory unit 1130, second starting port 1140, and normal electric accessory unit 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 46, which will be described later), is integrated with the unit body, and is arranged in the right region 1107, and is configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 1125, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric role product unit 1130 integrates a big prize slot 1131, a count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) for detecting the winning (passage) of a game ball into the big prize slot 1131, and a special electric role product 1133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned big winning hole 1131, a big winning hole that can win a left-handed game ball can be arranged, or a game can be played at the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 1131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 46 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1131 or is easily open, and cannot enter (pass through) a game ball into the large winning opening 1131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. state.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 1140 is arranged in the left region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, the second starting port 1140 is difficult or impossible to win a game ball hit to the left due to, for example, a game nail, etc., so that the game ball hit to the right can win is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 1140 as described above, and it may be provided in the right region 1107 so that, for example, a right-handed game ball can win. In addition, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left area 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a winning hole to which a game ball enters, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146 . In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147 called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) for operating the general electric movable member 1147 . Ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, ordinary electric movable member 1147, is an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 1140, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. Note that instead of the general electric movable member 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, for example, a shutter that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction may be employed.

(out port)
The out port 1178 is shot toward the game area 1105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140, the big winning port 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 1105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 1100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007 and has a group 1058 of performance characters such as movable characters controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 1300 , a payout/fire control circuit 1400 , and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 special symbol holding display portion 1166, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 1200 are a first starter switch 1121, a second starter switch 1141, a passage gate switch 1127, a count switch 1132, a general winning switch 1123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. External terminal board 1184, setting key 1174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 1203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. When the notch is provided and the key managed by the person in charge of the game hall is used to rotate the pachinko game machine from the island facility to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 1174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role product control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. , a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. The second pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can progress the game in any one of these game states.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability short-time playing state and the low-probability short-time playing state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 47 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process. This table is referred to when determining "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "big win" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small wins) are not included. When a game ball wins at 1140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, in the special symbol hit determination process, a "big hit" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number. In the special symbol hit determination table, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of the jackpot determination random number ( width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as “losing” and the corresponding loss judgment value data. there is

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the determination of the big hit is any one of 0 to 204, it is regarded as "big hit". It is determined, and the determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "losing" and determined. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Also, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 0 to 935, it is determined as a "big hit", The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for judging the big hit is neither 0 to 935, it is determined as "losing" and determined. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the starting ports 1120 and 1140 and the above-described determination value data, and determines the stop symbol. ” and “symbol designating command” are referred to. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA3" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA5" is selected as the pattern designation command.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the probability variable flag, the value of the time reduction flag, and the number of probability variables according to the winning time selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. , and the number of times of time saving, etc., are referred to when determining the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is "big win", the kind of big win is determined as follows. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", the number of time saving is " 10000”. Also, if the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10000”. In addition, when the winning time selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the kind of big hit is determined as follows. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the number of variable probability is "10000", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of time saving is " 10000”. In addition, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 49 are only examples, and are not limited to these. As described above, when the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the probability variation number is not set, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability variation control is not executed. .

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM1203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed. Time saving game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, in the present embodiment high probability time saving game state and low probability time saving game state), the time saving flag is set to ON, time saving control is not executed game state (for example, In the present embodiment, when the normal game state), the time saving flag is set to OFF.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state in this embodiment).

It should be noted that, as described above, the probability variation number "10000" is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the end of the big hit game state (that is, the next big hit). It is intended to be continuously implemented. Similarly, "10000" of the number of times of time saving means that the time saving control can be continuously executed until the next big hit.

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 50 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the second pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "details of presentation" in FIG. 50 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and determines the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbols includes the type of the special symbols, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbols (hit-or-lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random number, or/ And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. In addition, the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 29, Fig. 59), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the control number of the special symbol is 0 in S1002 (when S1002 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S1003), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S1004), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S1004 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 advances the processing to S1005. to

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S1003 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process of Move to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 1140 .

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S1003 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES, and the first special symbol is processed when S1004 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S1011 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1013 based on the control state number read in the process of S1012.

At S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

At S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

At S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

At S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

At S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S1021 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1024.

At S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result (for example, a big hit or a loss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of a big hit when the result of the special symbol hit judging process is, for example, a big win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 49) is referred to, and the type of big hit is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but the number of types of jackpots may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of big wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50), for example, the type of special design, the result of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special design, the random number for reach determination or / and the random number for selection of effect etc. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern is determined. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

At S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 52 S1014) is performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

At S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

At S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

At S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibited section. It is preferable to use

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1041), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1041), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

At S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

At S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol determinations (the number of executions of the special symbol game), but for example, the probability variation remaining number and time saving The number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the remaining number of games, may be managed. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 52 reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45 for both) via external terminal board 1184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 1131 (S1055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S1057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1058), and transmission reservation processing (S1059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S1057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 52 S1016) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined in S1052 that the stopped special symbol is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO in S1052), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first sets the special symbol control state number to "0" (S1061). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1063). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1016 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S1074) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 52 S1018) is performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1076). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

At S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls when winning the large winning opening 1131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 1131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

At S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

At S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1080) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1017 in FIG. 52) is performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

At S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the big winning hole opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S1091), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1091 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) for counting the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S1092 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has passed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO determination in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 1131 has elapsed (YES in S1093), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

At S<b>1094 , the main CPU 1201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 1131 . After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

At S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1095) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1016 in FIG. 52) is performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

At S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

At S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the processing of S1103, the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine is a sequential variation machine that does not variably display the first special symbols and the second special symbols in parallel, but variably displays them in order of winning. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the priority change machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 61) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 2105. center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof is omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball fired from a launching device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting hole 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by a general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right region 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 61 to be described later), which is arranged in the right side area 2107, and is constructed so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 2125, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 61 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right area 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a normal electric shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 2148 that operates the normal electric shutter 2147 (see FIG. 61 to be described later). The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the interior of the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning opening 2151 but has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that the later-described "accessory hit" is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( 61, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. is added to the value of the V attacker win counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 continues the opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating the "accessory open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. When entering, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

In addition, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 61, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol reserved display portion 2166, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2159 are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuitry 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 61, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-hand hitting is recommended in the normal game state, and right-hand hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 2007, for example.

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 62 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the game ball wins (passes) through the first starting port 2120, in the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value, the lottery result is " It is determined as a "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, in the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol big hit determination random value, the lottery result is "big hit" or "role". It is determined by "per object release".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol win determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol win determination process executed based on the winning to the first start port 2120 includes "big win" or "losing". , and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judging a big hit and the judgment value data corresponding thereto (“big hit judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”). In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the random number value for big hit determination determined as "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data (“jackpot determination value data”, “accessory release per determination value data”) is defined.

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at high settings than at low settings. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the starting ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-described determination value data. ” and “symbol designating command” are referred to. The ``select symbol command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the winning when the result of the winning judgment processing of the special symbols is a big win. It is a command for designating the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. selected. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is selected even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99. First, "zA2" is selected as the pattern designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the accessor product open hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command at the time of winning are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table includes the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot gaming state, the value of the time saving flag, the number of times of time saving, etc., according to the winning selection pattern command determined corresponding to the special pattern random number value. is referenced when determining the type of It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 64 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the jackpot The number of times of time saving after the game state is determined to be "4".

It should be noted that the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5" and "z6" are used when the judgment value data is "accessory object open judgment value data" (that is, when the result of the special symbol In the case of an open hit), the V attacker 2152 is opened by the open hit, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected to control the jackpot game state. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions are stipulated. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a winning hit, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game ball is not controlled to the big win game state, the big win game state is entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time saving times defined in the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 65 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the column of "details of effect" in FIG. 65 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball enters the first starting port 2120 ( It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection obtained when the In addition, since it is recommended to hit to the right in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the game ball hardly enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect obtained when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. It is determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection acquired when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 29, Fig. 76), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol working area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S2004), the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process of Move to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the processing target of the special symbol management process is the second special symbol when S2003 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES, and the first special symbol is processed when S2004 of the special symbol control process is determined as YES. It is subject to processing.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The processing of this S2018 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S2019 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S2021 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 62) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a prize release hit. In addition, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. Similarly, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, first, a process for determining whether or not the game is a big hit is performed. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "win selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the kind of big win when the result of the special symbol win judging process is, for example, a big win or a prize release win. In this process, the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 64) is referred to, and the type of the big win is determined according to the "hit selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of jackpot determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, the winning of the opening of the role is determined by the passing of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the role. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Also, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and prizes to be released, but the number of jackpots or prizes to be released may be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of jackpots and/or prizes to be released, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65), for example, the type of special design, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special design, the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random number or / and effect selection A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process ends. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited interval. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S2051 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, ie, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the winning prize (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2061. to

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting a game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first sets the special symbol control state number to "0" (S2071). Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2073). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S2081), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation processing. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. be done. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has passed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

At S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V prize detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above-mentioned specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the V winning device 2150. For example, within the specified time after the V attacker 2152 starts to operate, The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, a V hit signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that V winning has not been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". In this way, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 67) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a big win, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 70 is determined YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning prize, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the prize is derived (YES determination in S2060 in FIG. 70), and V winning is detected (see FIG. 73 S2095 is determined YES), V winning device 2150 (that is, opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as a large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67). will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the big winning hole opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 61) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2134. Move.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67). , the processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 66). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the first open mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is in the open state, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from when the short opening of the big winning opening is started until when the long opening of the big winning opening is finished. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the big winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the big winning opening is started (these two times are both short openings). ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 77, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 78, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, and with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. selected, with a selectivity of 35%, "z5" is selected.

FIG. 79 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 77 to 79, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10%. 10R normal jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of , and 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 80, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball enters the big winning hole and wins a big prize. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot game state and the game state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed alternately until the limiter number of times is reached, the so-called limiter machine is repeatedly executed, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state and , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called fall type game machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the fall lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole (for example, a special symbol hit determination A random number, a symbol random number of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determining process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determining process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol winning determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of time-saving hits, and the judgment of time-saving hits and losses Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process are, for example, the random numbers for special design hit determination, the random numbers for special design determination, the random numbers for normal hit determination, the random numbers for normal design determination, the random numbers for special design fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. It may be any timing such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-or-lose determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving judgment process using the random number for judging the special symbol, the time saving when it is the specific loss judgment value data, the specific small hit judgment value data or/and the specific big hit judgment value data It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving winning/losing determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the conditions for determining that the time-saving win-lose determination process is not limited to the above conditions, can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 21522152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the accession hit and the V attacker 2152 has opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of times of time saving based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random number for time-saving win-lose determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU is the starting information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process in any game state, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, the conditions for executing the time saving win-lose determination process are determined in advance, and this definition It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above. It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable to determine the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit" according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit” to the number of time saving remaining. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the hit selection pattern command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process and the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process, and it is possible to enhance the interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closure of the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the time saving based on the "time saving winning". It is good to start controlling.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

It should be noted that, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control processing is executed based on the result of the special symbol per determination processing, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control processing ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving a stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a prize open hit. However, when the V-attacker 2152 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to operate even after the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time saving control.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit and the big win game control process is not executed based on this role release hit, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and offer benefits (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. (balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit, which manages the game medium, that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media has been won (that winning combination is established) (Acquisition action), or an action of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. Moreover, it is not limited to ejecting the recording medium, and cash or cash equivalents may be ejected, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. not only can be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, game machines that shoot game balls from above the game area do not have the concept of foul balls, but if game balls are shot from below as in conventional gaming machines, foul balls are generated. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game values managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big win symbol, the general game state is shifted to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game state is shifted to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[5. Fourth pachinko machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the fourth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko machine called a digipachi, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are arranged in parallel in the same manner as the second pachinko machine. Only one of them is variably displayed without being variably displayed. Further, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example, the starting condition of the second special symbol rather than the starting condition of the first special symbol is a priority variable machine in which is established preferentially, and is also a so-called ST machine. In particular, the fourth pachinko game machine is provided with a sorting device that electrically sorts the game balls captured by the normal electric accessories so that they start winning either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It differs from the second pachinko game machine in that respect. Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from those of the second pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fourth pachinko machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 3184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the fourth pachinko machine (for example, , Hall computer 3186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the second pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the second pachinko game machine will be used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the second pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the second pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[5-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 81 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 81, the game board unit 3010 mainly includes a game panel 3100 in which a game area 3105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 3110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 3105. A center accessory 3115, general prize-winning ports 3122A and 3122B, a crew unit 3124, a passage gate unit 3125, a central entrance 3128, a special electric accessory unit 3130, and a normal electric accessory unit. 3145 , a starting winning accessory unit 3150 , an LED unit 3160 , an out port 3178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 3010 . Incidentally, the LED unit 3160 is the same as the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this fourth pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 3100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 3007 . In addition, a guide rail 3110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 3100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 3110 toward the game area 3105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 3105 while changing the traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 3100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 3100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 3100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 3100 may be entirely transparent, or only a part thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 3110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The play area 3105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 3110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 3006 (see FIG. 87) to the upper part of the game area 3105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 3115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 3100, and has an arcuate center rail 3116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 3105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 3116. - 特許庁

Also in the fourth pachinko game machine, in the same way as the second pachinko game machine, in the game area 3105, the area on the left side of the center role 3115 is called the left area 3106, and the area on the right side of the center role 3115 is referred to as right region 3107 .

A game ball shot toward the game area 3105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 3106 or the right area 3107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 3106 or the right side area 3107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 3100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 3106. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 3107 . That is, the player can hit the game ball toward the left area 3106 by hitting with the left and toward the right area 3107 by hitting with the right.

In addition, the center accessory 3115 is formed with a warp entrance 3117 on the left outer peripheral portion thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 3106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 3117 is configured to be guided to a stage 3118 formed in the center accessory 3115 . The stage 3118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 3007 . Note that the stage 3118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 3119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 3118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 3119 has a higher probability of entering the center than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 3117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 3117 but has not entered the chance entrance 3119. A ball enters (passes through) the mouth 3128 .

(Central entrance)
The central entrance 3128 is arranged directly below the chance entrance 3119 in the center accessory 3115 . A game ball entering (passing through) the central ball entrance 3128 enters the crew unit 3124 .

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 3122A are arranged in the lower left part of the game area 3105, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). . When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 3122A, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3123A (see FIG. 87 described later). One general winning hole 3122B is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3105, and among the game balls hit to the right, the special electric accessory unit 3130, the normal electric accessory unit 3145 and the starting winning accessory unit 3150 It is arranged so that a game ball that is not caught by the ball can win a prize (a game ball hit left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). Game nails are arranged around the general winning opening 3122B so that, for example, one ball can win in four numbers. detected.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 3122A is detected by the general winning opening switch 3123A (see FIG. 87 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 3122A The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 3122B is detected by the general winning opening switch 3123B (see FIG. 87 described later), for example, one prize ball is paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 3122B The number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning balls is not limited to one.

(croon unit)
The croon unit 3124 includes a croon pan 3210, a first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later), and two pass gate switches 3127A (see FIG. 87 described later). The croon plate 3210 is arranged below the central ball inlet 3128 and has a shallow circular concave surface. It is The first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later) is arranged in the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the first start port 3120A, and detects the passage of the game ball. A passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87 to be described later) is arranged in the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the normal figure start port 3220, and detects the passage of the game ball. In addition, even if the passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87 described later) is provided in each of the two normal pattern starting ports 3220, one is provided at the confluence portion of the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the two normal pattern starting ports 3220. may

A game ball that has entered (passed through) the central ball entrance 3128 is released in the circumferential direction to the outer peripheral portion of the croon plate 3210 . The game ball released to the croon dish 3210 goes around the outer circumference of the croon dish 3210 and moves toward the center of the concave surface while going around as the transfer speed becomes slower. Then, the game ball passes through either one of the first start port 3120A and the two normal figure start ports 3220, the first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later) or the passage gate switch 3127A (described later (see FIG. 87).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 3120A is detected by the first starting port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern starting port 3220 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127A, various data (for example, normal pattern hit determination random number etc.) are extracted normally, and various extracted data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 3127A detects the passage of the game ball to the normal figure starting port 3220, the prize ball is not paid out.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 3125 is arranged in the right region 3107, and includes a passing gate 3126 configured to allow a game ball struck to the right to pass through, and a passing gate switch 3127B for detecting passage of a game ball to the passing gate 3126. (See FIG. 87, which will be described later). The passage gate unit 3125 is arranged below the normal electric accessory unit 3145, and below the passage gate unit 3125, the special electric accessory unit 3130, the starting winning accessory unit 3150 and the general winning opening 3122B are arranged. be.

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 3126 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127B, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. Even if the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 3125 is detected by the passage gate switch 3127A, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 3125 may be located in the left region 3106 instead of or in addition to the right region 3107 .

In addition, the normal figure starting port 3220 and the passage gate 3126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous operation device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 87 described later), the accessory continuous operating device is operated to shift to the jackpot game state. You may do so.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern starting port 3220 and the passing gate 3126 is called starting passage, and the normal pattern extracted by the passage of the game ball to either the normal pattern starting port 3220 and the passing gate 3126 Various data related to (for example, random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are referred to as starting information of normal symbols. Further, until the start condition is satisfied, the storage of the starting information of the normal design is called suspension, and the starting information of the normal design that is suspended is also referred to as "suspended ball of the normal design". Also, the normal pattern may be abbreviated as the normal pattern.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 includes a big win big winning hole 3131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 3132 (see later-described FIG. 87) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 3131. , and the special electric accessories 3133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is arranged substantially in the lower right part within the game area 3105 .

The big winning opening 3131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 3131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 3115 A big winning hole for a big win in which a game ball can win a prize may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 3131 for big winning can win (pass) a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls when controlled to a big winning game state or a small winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening that is opened so as to be. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 3131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 87 described later), for example, 15 winning balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 3131 for big win is not limited to 15 pieces.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 87 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134 . The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the shutter 3134 for special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 3131 for a big hit, and to allow a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 3131 ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. State transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 3131 for big winning in the big winning game state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jack 3131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state. The small winning game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 3131 for big wins shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period. , It is different from the jackpot game state in that it is not performed over a plurality of rounds. In addition, in the small winning game state, it is possible to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times within a predetermined period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 3131 for big winning is opened when executing the big winning game control process and the small winning game control process. It may be provided in the big winning opening for small winning, the big winning opening for big winning 3131 is opened when the big winning game control process is executed, and the big winning opening for small winning is opened when the small winning game control process is executed.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is arranged above the passage gate unit 3125 in the right area 3107 of the game area 3105, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass). It is a unit body that integrates a winning opening 3149, a normal electric accessary ball entry switch 3122 (see FIG. 87 described later) for detecting winning of a game ball to this winning opening 3149, and a normal electric accessary 3146. In the present embodiment, the winning opening 3149 is a general winning opening, and the switch is a general winning opening switch.

The normal electric accessory 3146 includes a normal electric shutter 3147 that can move back and forth, and a normal electric solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 87 to be described later) that operates the normal electric shutter 3147 . The normal electric accessory 3146, that is, the normal electric shutter 3147, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the winning opening 3149, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning opening 3149. It is configured to be capable of transitioning to and from the state. Note that instead of the general electric shutter 3147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip, which is composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

When the normal electric accessory unit 3145 is arranged on the game panel 3100, the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 and passed through the winning opening 3149 is conveyed to the starting winning accessory unit 3150 ( 82) is formed. Details will be described later, but the movement destination of the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 is the first passage 3504 (see FIG. 82) directed to the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or a second passageway 3505 (see FIG. 82) directed to a second actuation mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82), the first actuation mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second actuation mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82). pass through either As a result, either the first non-electric accessory 3440 or the second non-electric accessory 3441 is opened.

(Start-up winning accessory unit)
The starting winning accessory unit 3150 is arranged below the passage gate unit 3125 and above the special electric accessory 3133 in the lower right area of the game area 3105 . The starting winning accessory unit 3150 includes a first non-electric accessory 3440, a second non-electric accessory 3441, an out port 3442, a cover plate 3443, etc., and is a unit body in which these members are integrated. When the start winning accessory unit 3150 is arranged on the game panel 3100, the first non-electric accessory 3440 and the second non-electric accessory 3441 are placed below the passage gate 3126. 1 non-electric accessories 3440 are arranged in order.

The first non-electric accessory 3440 includes a wing member 3510 rotatably attached to the main body of the starting winning accessory unit 3150, and a first operating mechanism 3511 ( See FIG. 82). As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3510 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction, and its central portion is rotatably supported to rotate along the board surface of the game panel 3100 . The blade member 3510 is switched between an open state in which the game ball easily rides on the inner surface of the blade member 3510 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 3510 by the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82).

The second non-electric accessory 3441 includes a wing member 3512 rotatably attached to the main body of the start-up winning accessory unit 3150, and a second operating mechanism 3513 ( See FIG. 82). As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3512 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction, and its central portion is rotatably supported to rotate along the board surface of the game panel 3100 . The second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82) is switched between an open state in which the game ball easily rides on the inner surface of the blade member 3512 and a closed state in which it is difficult to ride on the inner surface of the blade member 3512 .
The first non-electric accessory 3440 is provided with a first non-electric accessory operating switch 3514 (see FIG. 87) for detecting the opening operation of the blade member 3510 . In addition, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is provided with a second non-electric accessory operating switch 3515 (see FIG. 87) for detecting the opening operation of the blade member 3512 . When the main CPU 3201 (see FIG. 87) detects the game ball by the first starter switch 3121B or the second starter switch 3141, the first non-electric accessory operating switch 3514 or the second 2 Non-electric accessary product operation switch 3515 is determined to be abnormal when the game ball is not detected, and a reservation for transmission of a game abnormality detection command is made.

The first non-electrical accessory 3440 and the second non-electrical accessory 3441 are generally referred to as mechachu.

Although the details will be described later, the starting winning accessory unit 3150 moves the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 to either the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82). It further has a sorting device 3506 (see FIG. 82) that sorts the For this reason, either the wing member 3510 or the wing member 3512 is opened by being caught by the normal electric accessory 3146 .

The cover plate 3443 is a transparent decorative member that covers the lower right area of the game area 3105 . The front of the first non-electrical accessory 3440 and the second non-electrical accessory 3441 is covered with a cover plate 3443 . A guide path 3500 extending in a ridge is formed on the back surface of the cover plate 3443, and the guide path 3500 is arranged below the passage gate unit 3125 when the cover plate 3443 is attached to the game panel 3100. .

The guide path 3500 has a sloped portion extending obliquely to receive the game ball dropped from the passage gate unit 3125 side and lead it between the center accessory 3115 and the starting winning accessory unit 3150, and the lower end of this sloped portion. It has a guide portion from the side toward the special electric accessory 3133 side. The guide portion is formed in three steps, and holes are formed in the base portions of the steps. Of these two holes, the downstream hole functions as the first starting port 3120B, the central hole functions as the out port 3442, and the upstream hole functions as the second starting port 3140.

The rotation shaft of the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 is arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the hole functioning as the first starting port 3120B, and in the closed state, the tip portion hits the upstream side of the opening. The first starting port 3120B is closed by the blade member 3510 by contacting or approaching. In the open state, the tip of blade member 3510 is separated from guide path 3500 to open first start port 3120B, and blade member 3510 is formed with an arcuate slope toward first start port 3120B. By opening the blade member 3510 in this manner, a game ball can easily ride on it, and the game ball riding on the blade member 3510 moves toward the first start port 3120B. That is, by opening the blade member 3510, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first start opening 3120B.

Similarly, the rotation shaft of the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 is arranged downstream of the opening of the hole functioning as the second starting port 3140, and in the closed state, the tip of the blade member 3512 is The second starting port 3140 is closed by the blade member 3512 by abutting or approaching the upstream side of the opening. In the open state, the second starting port 3140 is opened by separating the tip of the blade member 3512 from the guide path 3500 , and the blade member 3512 forms an arcuate slope toward the second starting port 3140 . By opening the blade member 3512 in this manner, a game ball can easily ride on it, and the game ball riding on the blade member 3512 moves to the second start port 3140 side. That is, by opening the blade member 3512, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. As shown in FIG.

The out port 3442 is arranged between the second non-electrical accessory 3441 and the first non-electrical accessory 3440 in the guide path 3500 . A game ball flowing down along the guide path 3500 often passes through the out port 3442, and a game ball enters the out port 3442 relatively rarely. A game ball entering the out port 3442 is discharged outside the game panel 3100 and never returns to the game area 3105 again.

When a game ball wins in the first starting port 3120B, it is detected by the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87 described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the first start ports 3120A and 3120B, it triggers the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 3120B is detected by the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 3120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is detected by a second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is detected by a second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second starting ports 3140, it triggers the hit determination processing of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 3140 is detected by the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, one). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When game balls enter the second starting port 3140, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 3140 is not limited to this.

(Internal configuration of start winning accessory unit 3150)
Here, the main part of the internal configuration of the starting winning accessory unit 3150 will be described with reference to FIG.
The starting winning accessory unit 3150 further includes a common passage 3541, a first passage 3504, a second passage 3505, a sorting device 3506, a first operating mechanism 3511, and a second operating mechanism 3513. . The common path 3541 extends vertically downward, one end of the common path 3541 is connected to the outlet of the transport path 3540, and the other end of the common path 3541 branches into a first path 3504 and a second path 3505. are doing. The first passage 3504 extends diagonally downward with respect to the common passage 3541 , and the second passage 3505 extends vertically downward continuously from the common passage 3541 .

In the first passage 3504, the second passage 3505 and the common passage 3541, the flat plate 3550 on which the ridges 3551 to 3556 are formed is arranged with a gap to the extent that the game ball can pass through the back surface of the cover plate 3443. formed by A common passage 3541 is formed between the ridges 3555 and 3556 . A first passage 3504 is formed between the ridges 3551 and 3552 . A second passage 3505 is formed between the ridges 3553 and 3554 .

The ridges 3555 and 3556 are arranged in parallel along the vertical direction at intervals through which one game ball can pass. The protrusion 3551 is formed in an obtuse L-shape, extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the protrusion 3555, and further extends along the vertical direction. The ridge 3554 extends vertically along the lower end of the ridge 3555 . The ridges 3552 and 3553 are arranged inside the ridges 3551 and 3554, and the ridge 3552 is formed in an L-shape with an obtuse angle and extends obliquely downward and further along the vertical direction. there is The protrusion 3553 extends along the vertical direction. The vertical length of the ridge 3553 is longer than the length of the vertically extending portion of the ridge 3552, and the upper end of the ridge 3553 is arranged at an interval that allows the game ball to pass through the lower end of the ridge 3555. It is Therefore, the entrance of the first passage 3504 is lower than that of the second passage 3505 . The upper end of the protrusion 3553 is connected to the upper end of the protrusion 3552, and the portion of the protrusion 3552 extending obliquely downward is parallel to the portion of the protrusion 3551 extending obliquely downward.
A slit 3557 is formed in the protrusion 3554 . The slit 3557 is formed at a portion of the ridge 3554 that extends along the slope of the ridge 3552 .

(sorting device)
The sorting device 3506 is arranged in the area between the common passage 3541 and the second passage 3505 .

The sorting device 3506 sorts game balls that have been captured by the normal electric accessory 3146, passed through the common path 3541 and dropped from the exit of the common path 3541, to either the first path 3504 or the second path 3505. be.

The sorting device 3506 includes a flat plate member 3531 and a sorting solenoid 3532 (see FIG. 87) that slides the flat plate member 3531 in an oblique direction. The flat plate member 3531 is obliquely arranged above the entrance of the second passage 3505 and has a size capable of closing the second passage 3505 . The flat plate member 3531 can be slid in an oblique direction, and can be switched between a state in which the entrance of the second passage 3505 is closed and a state in which the entrance of the second passage 3505 is opened. be.

The main CPU 3201 controls the energization of the distribution solenoid 3532 . When the distribution solenoid 3532 is not energized, the entrance of the second passage 3505 is closed by the flat plate member 3531 . When the distribution solenoid 3532 is energized to change the solenoid core, the flat plate member 3531 moves obliquely upward to open the entrance of the second passage 3505 . At this time, substantially the entire flat plate member 3531 moves to the outside.

Since the cover plate 3443 is made of a transparent member, the operation of the flat plate member 3531 and how the game balls are distributed by the distribution device 3506 can be visually recognized by the player.

[Operation of distribution device 3506]
FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of game balls when the distribution device 3506 is de-energized. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of game balls when the distribution device 3506 is energized. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the board surface of the game panel 3100 when the game ball has passed through the first operating mechanism 3511. FIG. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the board surface of the game panel 3100 when the game ball has passed through the second operating mechanism 3513. FIG.

When the distribution device 3506 is de-energized, the second passage 3505 is closed by the distribution device 3506 as shown in FIG. In this state, when the normal electric accessory 3146 catches the game ball, the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511 as shown in FIG. Then, the blade member 3510 (see FIG. 81) of the first non-electric accessory 3440 (see FIG. 81) in the closed state switches to the open state as shown in FIG. In addition, when the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511 while the blade member 3510 is in the open state, the blade member 3510 is maintained in the open state. When the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when the second game ball is captured, the closed state is entered. In addition, when the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures two game balls at the same time in the open state, or when it captures two game balls at the same time after capturing one game ball, it becomes the closed state. In addition, although the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric accessory 3440 is in the open state and closed when two game balls are captured, it may be closed when one is captured.

When the distribution device 3506 is energized, the second passage 3505 is open as shown in FIG. In this state, when the normal electric accessory 3146 catches the game ball, the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513, and the second operating mechanism 3513 is interlocked with the passage of the game ball and is in a closed state. The blade member 3512 (see FIG. 81) of the second non-electric accessory 3441 (see FIG. 81) switches to the open state as shown in FIG. In addition, when the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513 while the blade member 3512 is in the open state, the blade member 3512 is maintained in the open state. When the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when the second game ball is captured, it becomes the closed state. In addition, when the second non-electric accessory 3441 captures two game balls at the same time in the open state, or switches to the open state and captures one game ball and then captures two at the same time, the closed state also occurs. In addition, although the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric accessory 3441 is in the open state and closed when two game balls are captured, it may be closed when one is captured.

By detecting the game ball captured by the first non-electrical accessory 3440 or the second non-electrical accessory 3441, the first starting port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87) or the second starting port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87) , a predetermined number of game balls are provided to the player as prize balls. In addition, when the normal electric accessory ball switch 3122 (see FIG. 87) detects game balls, a predetermined number of game balls are provided to the player as prize balls. In other words, when the game ball is caught by the normal electric shutter 3147 of the normal electric accessory 3146, the prize ball is given to the player. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the game ball captured by the normal electric shutter 3147 of the normal electric role 3146 always passes through the normal electric role ball entry switch 3122 after being captured, and the normal electric role Since a prize ball is given to the player when the game ball switch 3122 detects the game ball, the capture of the game ball by the normal electric accessory 3146 also includes the meaning of winning. Furthermore, even when the game ball is distributed to the first passage 3504 or the second passage 3505 by the distribution device 3506, it becomes easier to start and win the first start port 3120B or the second start port 3140, so that the player can win. You are given an opportunity to win the ball.

Incidentally, according to the above-described fourth pachinko game machine, the normal electric role 3146, the second non-electric role 3441, and the first non-electric role 3440 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. As long as the objects are arranged in the right area 3107 in the game area 3105, the order does not matter.

(out port)
In FIG. 81, the out port 3178 includes various winning ports (eg, first starting ports 3120A and 3120B, second starting port 3140, big winning port 3131, general winning port 3122A) that are launched toward the game area 3105. , 3122B, etc.) are discharged out of the machine. This out port 3178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 3105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 3178, an out port is provided in a position other than the most downstream side, for example, below the general winning port 3122B or in the crew dish 3210, and the game balls flowing down the game area 3105 are discharged out of the machine. You may do so.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 3010 as in the second pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the transparent game panel 3100 as described above. This back unit is provided with a performance accessory group 3058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 3300 (see FIG. 87, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 3058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 3007 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 3058 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[5-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 87, the control circuit of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 87 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 87, the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 3200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 3300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire It is composed of a control circuit 3400 and a power supply circuit 3450 .

[5-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 3200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 3201, a main ROM 3202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 3203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It has a circuit 3204, a backup capacitor 3207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 3202 , a main RAM 3203 , an initial reset circuit 3204 and the like are connected to the main CPU 3201 . The main CPU 3201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 3202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the fourth pachinko game machine by the main CPU 3201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 3201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 3202 .

The main RAM 3203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 3203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 3201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 3201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 3204 monitors the main CPU 3201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 3207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 3203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 3200 has an I/O port 3205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 3206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 3300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 3200 . For example, the main control circuit 3200 includes the normal symbol display portion 3161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 3162, the first special symbol display portion 3163, the second special symbol display portion 3164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 3165. , second special symbol holding display portion 3166, general electric solenoid 3148, special electric solenoid 3135, distribution solenoid 3532 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 3200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 3170, an error notification monitor 3172, and the like. Main control circuitry 3200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 3205 .

The performance display monitor 3170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 3201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 3172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 3172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 3200 includes first starter switches 3121A and 3121B, a second starter switch 3141, passage gate switches 3127A and 3127B, a big win win count switch 3132, a normal electric accessory ball entry switch 3122, General winning opening switches 3123A, 3123B, first non-electric accessory operating switch 3514, second non-electric accessory operating switch 3515, etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 3200 via I/O port 3205 .

Further, the main control circuit 3200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 3186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 3184, a setting key 3174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and backup data stored in the main RAM 3203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 3176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 3176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only those corresponding to the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 of the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 3174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 3176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are connected to the main control circuit 3200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 .

[5-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 3300 includes a sub CPU 3301, a program ROM 3302, a work RAM 3303, a display control circuit 3304, an audio control circuit 3305, an LED control circuit 3306, a character control circuit 3307, a command input port 3308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 3300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 3200 . Although not shown in FIG. 87, the sub-control circuit 3300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 3302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the fourth pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 3301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 3301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 3302 . In particular, the sub CPU 3301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 3200 .

A work RAM 3303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 3301 .

A display control circuit 3304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 3007 . The display control circuit 3304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 3304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 3301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 3304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 3007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 3007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 3007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 3304 can control the display device 3007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 3305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 3305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 3301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 3306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 3306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 3307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role product control circuit 3307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns are stored.

Also, the role product control circuit 3307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product operation command from the sub CPU 3301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 3301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 3308 is connected to command output port 3206 and receives various commands transmitted from main control circuit 3200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 3400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 3400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and makes game balls shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling the ball rental, a card unit 3180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 3200, the payout/launch control circuit 3400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 3082 and controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 3182 is connected to the card unit 3180 . The ball lending operation panel 3182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (none of which is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 3180 . The payout/launch control circuit 3400 controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 3180 . Although the operation panel 3182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 3180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 3400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 3450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 3200, the sub-control circuit 3300, the payout/launch control circuit 3400, and the like.

A power switch 3095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 3450 . The power switch 3095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 3200, the sub-control circuit 3300, the payout/launch control circuit 3400, etc.).

Since the game flow of the fourth pachinko game machine is the same as the game flow of the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 7, the explanation is omitted.

[5-3. Basic specifications of the fourth pachinko machine]
Next, basic specifications of the fourth pachinko game machine 1 will be described.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, a normal game state (sometimes abbreviated as normal state) in which neither variable probability control nor short time control is executed, a high probability short time game state in which both variable probability control and short time control are executed, and A low-probability short-time game state is prepared in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 3201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. . However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 3201 is not limited to this, and a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which variable-probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed may be added. Further, any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state may not be progressed. For example, the game progresses in one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, by satisfying a predetermined condition as the time saving control, control is performed to operate the time saving a, time b and c time saving. The details of time saving a, time saving b, and time saving c will be described later.

Further, in the fourth pachinko game machine, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability short-time playing state and the low-probability short-time playing state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method in the display area of the display device 4007, for example. In addition, even if you shift from the high-probability short-time gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state to the normal game state or the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, you can immediately shift again to the high-probability short-time gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state. When it is decided, it is possible to perform a display recommending hitting to the right even in the normal game state or the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

[Big hit, small hit probability]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 3201 detects that the game ball has entered the first start ports 3120A and 3120B, it extracts a random number for judging the first special symbol from the counter for judging the big hit (hereinafter referred to as the (referred to as 1 special symbol lottery or 1 special symbol lottery), the hit determination table (not shown) of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 3203 is referred to, and the extracted random number for determination of the big hit is determined. conduct.

In addition, when the main CPU 3201 detects the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440, it extracts the second special symbol jackpot determination random number from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol lottery or special symbol 2 lottery), a hit determination table (not shown) of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 3203 is referred to, and a big hit determination is performed with respect to the extracted random number for determination of a big hit.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the probability of determining a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/319 in the low probability state and about 1/99 in the high probability state. The probability of a small hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is 0. The probability of big hit determination in the second special symbol lottery is 0, the probability of small hit determination is about 317/319 in a low probability state, and about 97/99 in a high probability state. Here, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the function of supporting the winning of the second start port 3140 by operating the normal electric accessory 3146, the so-called electric chew support It is difficult to enter the second starting gate 3140 because there is no In addition, although the details will be described later, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, even if the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the first non-electric accessory 3440 opens and the first start port 3120 wins It becomes easy, and it is difficult to win the second start gate 3140 . Thus, since it is difficult to win the second starting port 3140 in the high probability state, it is a specification that makes it difficult to win a small hit in the variable probability state, which is a high probability state. In addition, the jackpot may be included in the hit determination table of the second special symbol of the fourth pachinko game machine. can be set to In addition, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, the result of the second special symbol lottery is almost a small win, and there is no need for an effect to expect a transition to a small win game state, so that the game can be smoothly progressed. In addition, the pattern of short-time variation is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the game state shifts to a big win game state by winning a big win by a special lottery, a round game with the number of rounds "10 times" is executed. One round ends when 10 game balls win or are released for 30 seconds, and this round is repeated 10 times. When shifting to a small winning game state by winning a small winning by special lottery, the big winning opening 3131 for big winning is opened 10 times. At this time, one opening time is set to such an extent that one game ball can win a prize.

[Number of prize balls]
When winning the big winning opening 3131 for big winning, 15 game balls are paid out. When winning the first starting ports 3120A and 3120B, four game balls are paid out. When winning the second starting port 3140, 15 game balls are paid out. When winning the big winning opening 3131 for big winning, 15 game balls are paid out. When winning the general winning hole 3122A, four game balls are paid out. When winning the general winning opening 3122B, one game ball is paid out. When winning the normal electric accessory 3146, one game ball is paid out.

[Time saving game]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, when any one of the following three conditions is satisfied, the state is shifted to the time saving state.
・ After the big hit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a time saving)
・When the number of lotteries related to the operation of the condition device, that is, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the specified number of times n (hereinafter sometimes referred to as b time saving)
・If the combination of special symbols is a predetermined combination that is not a big hit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as c time reduction)

(a Time saving)
In the case of a time saving, the number of times N of time saving can be arbitrarily set. However, when having b time saving, it is desirable that the number of times N of time saving in the low probability time saving game state is the number of times b time saving does not operate (for example, less than the number of times of operation n). In the fourth pachinko game machine, after the big hit is completed, the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state, and the number of times of time-saving "160 times" is provided.

(b time saving)
b In the case of time saving, the number of operations n shall be within the following range.
2.5/ML ≤ n ≤ 3.0/ML (ML is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability in the low probability state)
In addition, the number of operations n is always counted during the low probability regardless of the presence or absence of time saving. In addition, although it is desirable not to count the number of special figure fluctuations in the high probability, it does not exclude counting the number of special figure fluctuations in the high probability in the present invention.
There are three clear patterns for the number of times n of operations.
When clearing the RAM When clearing the RAM due to a setting change When the condition device is activated or terminated In other words, although it has special figures 1 and 2, it is impossible to count only special figures 1 or only special figures 2. Moreover, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is impossible to set the value of the number of operations n for each setting. In addition, since b time saving is similar to the ceiling function in pachislot in that it is activated after the number of times of operation reaches n, it may be called ceiling time saving.
The number of times N of time saving can be set as appropriate, but is preferably within the range of N≦3.8/ML. Here, it is desirable to set a plurality of frequency patterns such as 100 times, 200 times, . does not exclude that In addition, it is desirable not to move to a high probability state, although it is also possible for the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery to shift to a high probability state. However, in the present invention, it does not exclude the transition to the high probability state of the normal drawing lottery. For example, even if the normal drawing lottery is in a high probability state, if the winning probability is not much different from the winning probability in the normal game state, it may be shifted to a high probability state.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is about 319, the number of times of operation n is set to 850 times, and the number of times of time reduction N can be set to a value of "1200 times" or less after reaching the number of times of operation n. be. In the fourth pachinko game machine, when b time saving is activated, "1200 times" is set as the number of time saving times N, and special figure 2 variation "1 time" is given in combination with it. That is, the end condition of b time saving is when either of the special figure 1 variation "1200 times" and the special figure 2 variation "1 time" is satisfied. In the time saving state (b time saving), the normal pattern fluctuation is performed at a higher speed than in the normal state, or an open pattern with a long opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is easily selected, and the normal electric average open time is longer.

In addition, there is no need to display the dedicated pattern when reaching the specified number of times n of operation, and the specification is such that if the winning pattern is lost, the winning pattern is displayed, and if the small winning pattern is displayed, the small winning pattern is displayed. In addition, as for the variation pattern of the special symbol when reaching the number of times of actuation n, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected only in the variation pattern table selected after winning. In addition, when a small win is won when the number of times of operation reaches n, it is necessary to operate both the time saving and the small win. In addition, when both b time saving and c time saving are established at the same time, it is necessary to determine which one is prioritized by the program.

(c time saving)
c Time saving operates after a combination display of a specific special design. The operation of c time saving is effective only when the special drawing lottery is in a low probability non-time saving state. Moreover, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is impossible to determine the winning probability of time-saving symbols for each setting. The transition to c time saving is determined by lottery using big hit random numbers. The number of times N of time saving accompanying the time saving symbol winning can be set as appropriate, but it is desirable to be set within the range of N≦3.8/ML. However, it is desirable not to set multiple frequency patterns (e.g., 20 times, 50 times, etc.) for b time saving, but set multiple frequency patterns (e.g., 20 times, 50 times, etc.) for c time saving. It is possible to determine which number of times in a plurality of number of times patterns is to be made using a big hit random number or a pattern random number of a time saving pattern. Moreover, the lottery probability which becomes the design which shifts to c time saving in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may differ. In addition, it is desirable not to shift the winning probability of the general drawing lottery to a high probability state after displaying a combination of specific special symbols that shorten c time. In addition, even if the general pattern lottery is in a high probability state, the probability of winning is not much different from the probability of winning in the normal game state (for example, the probability of winning in the normal game state is 1/200, If the figure winning probability is 1/199.2), it may be shifted to a high probability state.

b Time saving and c time saving are the number of times of saving time N (sum of the number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of special figure 2). It is possible to use them together.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is about 319, the number of time saving times N can be set to a value of, for example, "1200 times" or less after displaying the combination of time saving patterns. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the c time saving is activated, "1200 times" is set as the time saving number N, and the special figure 2 variation "1 time" is given in combination with it. That is, the end condition of c time saving is when either of the special figure 1 variation "1200 times" and the special figure 2 variation "1 time" is satisfied. In the time saving state (c time saving), the normal pattern fluctuation is performed at a higher speed than in the normal state, or an open pattern with a long opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is likely to be selected, and the common electric average open time is longer.

In addition, for the convenience of the following explanation, the state in which a time saving is operating is referred to as a time saving state, the state in which b time saving is operating is referred to as b time saving state, and the state in which c time saving is operating is referred to as c time saving state. be. In addition, in the fourth pachinko machine, the number of times of time reduction a, b time reduction, and c time reduction are different from each other, and b time reduction and c time reduction are the number of times of time reduction, the normal pattern fluctuation time during time reduction, and the normal pattern fluctuation time. They have the same winning probability and perform the same operation. Therefore, a time-saving state, b time-saving state and c time-saving state are collectively referred to as a time-saving game state, and a time-saving state is collectively called a first time-saving game state, b time-saving state and c time-saving state are collectively called a second time-saving game state. sometimes referred to as

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the time saving game state ends when the special symbols start to fluctuate according to the last number of times of time saving. It should be noted that the time saving game state may end when the special symbol starts to fluctuate according to the last number of times of time saving.

The fourth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type pachinko machine, but it is also possible to install b time reduction and c time reduction in a so-called type 1 type 2 type pachinko machine like the third pachinko. is. However, in the case of 1 type and 2 types of pachinko game machines, there is no high probability game state, normal pattern fluctuation time and normal pattern stop in normal state, a short game state, b short game state and c short game state The probability of winning the time and normal drawing lottery is the same.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the time saving a can be operated via a big hit when any of the time saving a, the time saving b, and the time saving c overlap. b time saving cannot be operated when it overlaps during a time saving and b time saving, but can be operated when it overlaps during c time saving. However, it is necessary to keep the performance of b time saving and c time saving (variation time of normal map, stop time of normal map, open time of normal map, probability of normal map, etc.) together. Time saving c cannot be operated during any of time saving a, time saving b, and time saving c. If the time saving is not overlapped, even if the other time saving is established during one time saving, the other time saving establishment shall be ignored. The number of times of shortening of working hours in the case of repeating the shortening of working hours becomes the number of shortening of working hours that has a larger number of fluctuations when the other shortening of working hours is established during one of the shortening of working hours. The time saving performance when time saving overlaps maintains the time saving performance that was being executed regardless of the number of fluctuations when the other time saving is established during one time saving. In addition, in this invention, when the other time saving is materialized during one time saving, you may operate the other time saving.

[Operating patterns of normal electric accessory and sorting device]
FIG. 88 is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 when winning the normal symbol lottery, and FIG. (referred to as open pattern 1), FIG. 88(b) is a pattern in a time saving state (hereinafter referred to as open pattern 2), FIG. 88(c) is a pattern in b time saving state and c time saving state (hereinafter, open pattern 3).
When the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state, the normal electric accessory 3146 repeats the opening/closing operation as shown in FIG. 88(a), and opens 10 times within a predetermined time. The closed state is set from the opening end point to the next opening start point, and the closed state time is set longer than the open time. As shown in FIG. 88(a), the distribution device 3506 is energized at the timing when the normal electric accessory 3146 is in the open state. In other words, in the normal state, when the general drawing lottery is won and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the second operating mechanism 3513 operates to open the second non-electric accessory 3441. From this, the special figure 2 lottery will be easier to carry out.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the time saving state, the normal electric accessory 3146 opens nine times within a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 88(b). The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is obtained by reversing the timing of opening and closing in the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 shown in FIG. 88(a). The sorting device 3506 has the same sorting pattern as in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 88(b). That is, in the time saving state a, when the general drawing lottery is won and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the first operating mechanism 3511 operates and the first non-electric accessory 3440 opens. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery will be easier to perform.

In addition, in the time saving state a, when winning the normal drawing lottery, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 3146 is longer than in the normal state, so the normal electric accessory 3146 easily catches the game ball.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the b time saving state or the c time saving state, the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened once and closed, as shown in FIG. 88(c). The distribution device 3506 is opened at the timing when the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened. That is, in the b time reduction state and the c time reduction state, when the general drawing lottery is won and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the second operating mechanism 3513 operates and the second non-electric accessory 3441 Since it will be in the open state, it will be easier to perform the special figure 2 lottery.

It should be noted that the timing of energizing the distribution device 3506 may be delayed by the time that the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 reaches the distribution device 3506 . As a result, the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal state is on the second operating mechanism 3513 side (special figure 2 side), and the game ball captured by the normal electric accessory 3146 in the time saving state is the first operating mechanism It becomes possible to distribute reliably by the 3511 side (special figure 1 side).

In order to perform the normal pattern lottery in the normal state, the game ball is entered into the normal pattern starting port 3220 of the crew unit 3124 by hitting left, or the game ball is entered into the passage gate 3126 by hitting right. be either According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 is configured such that the base for left-handed hitting is higher than that for right-handed hitting in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit left.

[Normal figure election in normal state]
FIG. 89 shows the normal electric accessory 3146, the sorting device 3506, the second non-electric accessory operating switch 3515, the second non-electric accessory 3441, and the big winning opening 3131 for the big hit when the general pattern is won in the normal state. 4 is a time chart showing state transitions; In 4th execution form, as when general figure election is done in normal state, there is a case where the game sphere enters the general figure start mouth 3220 of croon unit 3124.

For example, when a game ball enters the normal figure starting port 3220 of the crew unit 3124, the normal symbol fluctuation and stop. When the normal symbols stop in the winning mode, the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened. At this time, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, since the distribution device 3506 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the special figure 2 side, and the second non-electric accessory operation switch 3515 activates the game ball Immediately after the detection, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is in an open state. The second non-electric accessory 3441 captures two game balls and becomes closed. When the second non-electric accessory 3441 catches two game balls, two game balls enter the second starting port 3140 . Since winning a prize at the second starting port 3140 results in winning a small prize with a high probability, a small prize game is performed twice. Specifically, since the big winning opening 3131 for big winning is opened 10 times in one small winning game, it is opened 20 times in total. One open time at this time is set to such an extent that one game ball can be captured. In other words, the interval from when the normal electric accessory 3146 opens and closes to when the next opening starts is set to a time during which the big winning opening 3131 can be opened 20 times. After the two small winning games are completed, the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened for the second time. Even after the opening of the normal electric accessory 3146 for the second time, the small winning game is performed twice similarly to the first time. Since the normal electric accessory 3146 is opened 10 times, 2 small winning games are repeated 10 times.
As described above, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the normal pattern lottery is won in the normal state and the normal pattern winning game is started, the small winning game in which 10 game balls can win is executed 20 times. Therefore, the normal per-symbol game is executed over a relatively long period of time.

[General drawing election in a reduced working hours]
In the time-saving state a, the game proceeds by entering the game ball into the passage gate 3126 by striking to the right as described above. When the normal figure is won in the time saving state, the distribution device 3506 operates in a pattern in which the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 and the timing of closing are reversed. Therefore, since the distribution device 3506 is not energized when the normal electric accessory 3146 catches the game ball, as shown in FIG. Immediately after the object actuation switch 3514 is turned on, the first non-electric accessory 3440 is opened. Then, the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures two game balls and becomes closed. The game ball captured by the first non-electric accessory 3440 wins the first starting port 3120B. Then, when the special figure 1 lottery is won, a jackpot game is executed.

When the jackpot game is won during the normal symbol winning game, the normal symbol winning game is forcibly terminated. As a result, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the normal electric accessory 3146 catches the game ball before the game ball flows down to the big winning prize opening 3131 during the big winning game and the big winning prize opening 3131 cannot catch the game ball. can.

In addition, in the time saving state a, the time in which the normal electric accessory 3146 is in the open state is longer, and the normal electric accessory 3146 captures many game balls, while the normal electric accessory 3146 is on the upstream side. Since the game ball is caught, it becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down to the first non-electric accessory 3440 side. Therefore, when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures a plurality of game balls, the first non-electric accessory 3440 is opened by the first game ball, but the game ball flows down to the first non-electric accessory 3440 side. Since it is difficult to close, the first non-electric accessory 3440 is unlikely to be closed. Therefore, even if the next game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511, the first non-electric accessory 3440 remains open, and when the normal electric accessory 3146 is closed, the normal electric accessory 3146 The first non-electric accessory 3440 enters a closed state when the game ball that is not captured by the ball enters the first non-electric accessory 3440 . As a result, the first non-electric accessory 3440 captures two game balls by opening the normal electric accessory 3146 once in the time saving state a as well as in the normal state.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200 are performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and some processes are added. , with the changes.
Specifically, the following additions and changes have been made.
After the normal symbol control process performed in S40 shown in FIG. 16, as shown in FIG. 90, a sorting device control process performed in S4010 and a non-electric accessary product management process performed in S4020 are added. The sorting device control process will be described later using FIG. 91 . In the non-electric role product management process, the state of the first non-electric role product 3440 and the second non-electric role product 3441 is based on the state of the first non-electric role product operating switch 3514 or the second non-electric role product operating switch 3515. , and a game abnormality detection command is transmitted to the main CPU 3201 when it is determined to be abnormal.

Also, the fourth pachinko gaming machine executes the game state management process performed in S1030 shown in FIG. In this process, the main CPU 3201 updates the variable probability flag, the time saving flag, and the like. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since there are a first time-reduction gaming state (a time-reduction) and a second time-reduction gaming state (b time-reduction or c time-reduction) as the time-reduction gaming state, conditions for transition to the first time-reduction gaming state is satisfied, the first time saving flag is turned on, and when the end condition of the first time saving game state is satisfied, the first time saving flag is turned off. Similarly, when the transition condition to the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the second time-saving flag is turned on, and when the end condition of the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied, the second time-saving flag is turn off.

Also, the second pachinko game machine executes the processing performed in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a big win, the special electric accessory 1133 is driven to open the big winning opening 1131 for big wins, and in the case of a small win, the solenoid 1154 for small wins is driven. to open the big winning opening 1151 for small winning. According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 3201 drives the special electric accessory 3133 to open the big winning opening 3131 for both big wins and small wins.

Further, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, part of the normal symbol variable display start process performed in S213 shown in FIG. 30 is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, other processes than those described above are the same as those in the second embodiment. Therefore, description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 is omitted.

(Sorting device control process)
A subroutine (sorting device control process) executed in step S4010 of FIG. 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S4030, when the control state number of the normal symbol is the value (3) indicating the normal electric gain release, the main CPU 3201 shifts the process to step S4031 and does not indicate the normal electric gain release (3). If so, terminate this subroutine.

In step S4031, the main CPU 3201 sets a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 3121 to the main RAM 3203 based on the distribution pattern stored in the main RAM 3203 and shown in FIG. By outputting this control signal from each port in step S45, solenoid power is supplied to the sorting solenoid 3121 (see FIG. 87), and the sorting device 3506 is driven. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends. Note that the sorting device control process may be executed, for example, in the normal electric accessary product release process (see FIG. 30) of step S216.

[Regular symbol variable display start process]
The subroutine (normal symbol variable display start process) executed in step S213 of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, in step S4041, the main CPU 3201 determines whether or not the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating the normal symbol variable display start process. In addition, when the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating the variable display start processing of the normal symbol, the main CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of step S4042, and the normal control state number starts the variable display start processing of the normal symbol. If it is not the indicated value (0), this subroutine ends.

In step S4042, the main CPU 3201 determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol reserved storage number data (the number of reserved symbols) stored in the main RAM 3203 is "0". When the value of the normal design reserved memory number data (reserved number) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S4043, and when the value of the normal design reserved memory number data (reserved number) is "0" , the process proceeds to step S4051.

In step S4043, it is determined whether or not the first time saving flag is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time saving flag is ON, the process moves to step S4044. On the other hand, when the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time saving flag is not ON, that is, when determining that it is not in the first time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4045.

In step S4044, a process of judging a normal symbol hit is performed with a high probability. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to the winning determination table with a high winning probability, and determines whether the game ball passes through the winning determination value stored in the winning determination table and the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B included in the start memory. It is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol hit determination extracted when it is matched. If they match, you win, and if they don't match, you lose. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4046.

In step S4045, a process of judging a normal symbol hit is performed with a low probability. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to the winning determination table with a low winning probability, and the winning determination value stored in the winning determination table and the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B included in the start memory. It is determined whether or not the random number for normal symbol hit determination extracted when it is matched. If they match, you win, and if they don't match, you lose. That is, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery in the first time-saving game state is high, and the winning probability of the normal drawing drawing in the normal state and the second time-saving game state is low. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4046.

In step S4046, an opening pattern setting process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 3201 sets the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 shown in FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4047.

In step S4047, the main CPU3201 sets the normal symbol effect start command in the main RAM3203. The normal symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 3300 by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200 . The normal design effect start command includes data such as game state, fluctuation time, normal design, opening pattern of normal electric accessory 3146, and the like. The sub CPU 3301 of the sub control circuit 3300 will start the production based on the received normal symbol production start command. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4048.

In step S4048, the main CPU 3201 sets a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) to the normal symbol waiting time timer. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4049.

In step S4049, the main CPU 3201 sets the normal control state number to the value (1) indicating the end of the normal symbol variable display. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S4050.

In step S4050, the main CPU 3201 clears the storage area used for this change. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S4051, the main CPU 3201 performs normal symbol demonstration display processing. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Open pattern setting process]
A subroutine (opening pattern setting process) executed in step S4046 of FIG. 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S4061, the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving gaming state is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 3201 performs processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state depending on the presence or absence of the second time-saving flag. If it is determined to be the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4062. If not determined to be the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4063.

In step S4062, the main CPU 3201 performs processing for determining the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to be the release pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 3441, that is, the release pattern 3 shown in FIG. . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S4063, the process of determining whether or not the first time-saving gaming state is performed. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state depending on the presence or absence of the first time-saving flag. When it determines with it being the 1st time saving game state, a process is moved to step S4064. If not determined to be the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4065.

In step S4064, the main CPU 3201 performs processing for determining the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to be the release pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the first non-electric accessory 3440, that is, the release pattern 2 shown in FIG. . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S4065, the main CPU 3201 performs processing for determining the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 to be the release pattern that facilitates guiding the game ball to the second non-electric accessory 3441, that is, the release pattern 1 shown in FIG. . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[5-5. Game state transition]
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the game using the fourth pachinko game machine.

In many cases, the game starts in a normal state at the beginning of the game. In the normal state, the player hits to the left, aiming to enter the ball into the central ball entrance 3128, and proceeds with the game. When the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128, the game ball moves to the crew dish 3210 and passes through either the first start hole 3120A or the normal figure start hole 3220. - 特許庁A special figure 1 lottery is performed when the game ball passes through the first start port 3120A, and when a big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the state shifts to a big win game state (first bonus). As described above, the jackpot winning probability in the special figure 1 lottery is 1/319, and the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is 10 rounds. In addition, one round ends when 10 game balls win or the opening time elapses for 30 seconds, and since 15 prize balls enter the jackpot jackpot 3131, a prize that can be won by jackpot games. The number of balls is about 1500.

After the end of the jackpot game state (first bonus) shifted by the jackpot winning of the special drawing 1 lottery, the jackpot winning probability of the special drawing 1 lottery shifts to a high probability state of 1/99.9, and the time saving number of times is 160 times. It shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving). When the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the first time saving game state (a time saving), it shifts to the big hit game state (first bonus), and after the jackpot game state (first bonus) ends, the special figure 1 lottery is a high probability state. , the number of times of time saving is reset to 160 times. When 160 times of time saving frequency is digested, it shifts to a normal state (low probability non-working time saving state).

On the condition that the number of special figure fluctuations in the low probability state of the special lottery (total number of special figure 1 fluctuations and special figure 2 fluctuations) has reached 850 times, the second time saving game state (b time saving) Transfer, "1200 times" and special figure 2 variation "1 time" are given by the sum of special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation as the number of time reduction. Also, even if the stop mode of the special figure in the case of not winning the jackpot in the special figure lottery is a special mode, the second time-saving game state (c time-saving) is entered, and the number of time-saving times is special figure 1 fluctuation and special. "1200 times" and special figure 2 variation "1 time" are given in addition to the figure 2 variation.

Here, in the fourth pachinko game machine, since the passage gate 3126 is arranged in the right side area 3107, when the transition is made to the time-saving state b, the player hits to the right to proceed with the game. . At this time, when the normal figure lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 3126 is won, and the normal electric accessory 3146 is operated and the game ball is captured, the game ball starts at the second start port 3140 and wins. will do. Therefore, the number of times of time saving in the b time saving state is substantially one time.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, a special mode is included in the stopping modes of a plurality of types of special symbols that are small hits. Here, in the fourth pachinko game machine, since there is no small win in the special figure 1 lottery and there is a small win in the special figure 2 lottery, the combination of stop symbols in the special figure 1 fluctuation is a special mode. no. Therefore, the c time saving state can be shifted to the b time saving state. Even when the state is shifted to the c time saving state, as in the b time saving state, the player hits to the right to proceed with the game, and it becomes easier to start winning the second start port 3140, so the c time saving state. The number of times is substantially one. Thus, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state in the fourth pachinko game machine is substantially "one time".

In the second time-saving game state, it is possible to start winning to the second start port 3140, and most of the special figure 2 lotteries are small hits, so the small game is executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation stops. be done. Furthermore, if the stop pattern of the small hit winning is a special mode, it will shift to the second time saving game state (c time saving state) and the small win game will be executed. After the end of the small winning game, if there is no special figure 2 reservation, the second time-saving game state is ended. Incidentally, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, if the stop pattern of winning the small win is a special mode, the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) and the small win game is executed, but it is limited to this. isn't it. For example, when a part of stop symbols that are lost stop in a special mode, the second time-saving gaming state (c time-saving state) may be entered. In this case, the player cannot win a prize ball by a small hit, but by controlling in this way, it is possible to make an effect such as continuing or starting the time saving under the pretense of the end of the time saving.

Thus, in the fourth pachinko game machine, on the condition that the special figure variation reaches 850 times in the low probability state of the special figure lottery, the small winning game shifts to the small winning RUSH in which the small winning games are easily executed continuously. do. The details of the small hit RUSH will be described later, but the small hit RUSH has no special figure 2 suspension when digesting the special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving once, and the stop mode of the special figure 2 of the final fluctuation does not give time saving Stop If it is an aspect, in other words, if it is not a special aspect, the process ends. When the small hit RUSH is completed, it shifts to the normal state.

When the general pattern is elected in the normal state, specifically, in the normal state, the general pattern lottery is performed when the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128 and passes through the general pattern start port 3220, When the general pattern is won, it shifts to the second bonus for 20 small hits. In the second bonus, since 10 prizes can be expected to enter the big prize winning port 3131 for big wins in one small winning game, 3000 prize balls can be expected and 10 prizes can be awarded to the second starting port 3140. 300 prize balls will be added. Thus, a maximum of 3300 prize balls can be expected in the second bonus. However, it is not always possible to win one by opening the big winning opening 3131 for one big hit, or if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the time of winning the general pattern, the special figure 1 fluctuation will stop. Since the variation in FIG. 2 cannot be started, the number of small hits may decrease, so it is not always possible to obtain a maximum of 3300 prize balls. In the fourth pachinko game machine, 1000 to 3300 prize balls can be expected in the second bonus. When the second bonus ends, the normal state is entered.

[Small win RUSH]
Next, the small hit RUSH will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, the player hits to the left in the normal state, and by entering the game ball into the central ball entrance 3128, the game proceeds by aiming for a special figure 1 jackpot or a normal figure hit. Here, the probability that the game ball that entered the central ball entrance 3128 will win the first start opening 3120A is 1/3, so in the normal state it is difficult to store the reservation of the special figure 1 fluctuation. there is For this reason, there are many cases where there is no suspension of special figure 1 variation when special figure variation reaches 850 times.

Figure 95 shows the case where the special figure fluctuation reaches 850 times without holding the special figure 1 fluctuation and shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving), and the second time saving game state (b time saving ), by hitting to the right and passing the game ball through the passing gate 3126, normal pattern fluctuation is started. When the normal pattern variation stops in a hit mode, the normal electric accessory 3146 is activated. When the ordinary electric accessory 3146 operates and the ordinary electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball (ordinary electric award in FIG. 95), the second non-electric accessory 3441 operates and becomes an open state, and two games Due to the passage of the ball, the second non-motorized accessory 3441 closes. Two game balls that have passed through the second non-electric accessory 3441 start winning in the second start opening 3140 (special figure 2 winning in FIG. 95), special figure 2 starts to fluctuate in the previous starting winning, and later The special figure 2 variation due to the start winning prize is suspended. When the special figure 2 starts to fluctuate, the second time-saving game state is terminated and the winning probability of the special figure lottery shifts to a low probability state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, most of the small hits are won, so the small hit game is executed (small hit operation in FIG. 95, end of small hit operation).

Here, if the stop mode of the special figure 2 in which the small hit is won is a special mode, it shifts to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) after the small-hit game ends. However, since the reserved special figure 2 fluctuation is started immediately, the second time-saving game state ends in a short time. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 3126 during the second time-saving game state from the end of the small hit game to the start of the next special figure 2 fluctuation, and the normal figure fluctuation is almost never started. . Therefore, it is extremely difficult to increase the special figure 2 suspension during the second time-saving game state triggered by the previous special figure 2 start winning prize. Therefore, whether or not the last special figure 2 variation is the variation to move to the time saving state regardless of whether the previous variation when there is a reserved special figure 2 variation is the variation to move to the time saving state determines the RUSH termination. In addition, regardless of whether the small hit stop mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation triggered by the special figure 2 start winning after being held is a special mode, a small hit game is executed (a small hit in FIG. 95 operation, end of small hit operation). In addition, if the small hit stop mode of the special figure 2 due to the later start winning is a special mode, it shifts to the second time saving game state (c time saving state) after the small hitting game ends.

In this case, special figure 2 variation does not start because special figure 2 is not reserved after the end of the small hit game. Since it is necessary to win the normal figure lottery in order to start the special figure 2 fluctuation, the player hits to the right and passes the game ball through the passage gate 3126 during the second time saving game state, Initiate the normal shift. Normal figure fluctuation at this time will be started during the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state). When the normal figure fluctuation stops in a hit mode, the normal electric accessory 3146 operates, and when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball, the second non-electric accessory 3441 operates and becomes an open state, and two games Due to the passage of the ball, the second non-motorized accessory 3441 closes. Two game balls that have passed through the second non-electric accessory 3441 start and win the second start port 3140 . After that, two small winning games corresponding to the starting winning of two game balls to the second starting port 3140 are executed in the same manner. In this way, if the stop mode of the special figure 2 due to the subsequent start winning is a special mode, after the end of the small winning game, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state, and the state in which it is easy to win the small winning is repeated. That is, the small hit RUSH continues.

FIG. 96 shows the case where the small hit RUSH ends, and while the stop mode of the special figure 2 due to the later start winning indicates the small hit winning, if it is not a special mode, it is shown in FIG. 96 (a) As shown, after the end of the small winning game, the small winning RUSH ends and returns to the normal state.
Also, if the stop mode of the special figure 2 due to the subsequent start winning is neither a big hit nor a small win, and if it is not a special mode, as shown in FIG. , the small hit RUSH ends and returns to the normal state.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variation is "1", but it may be larger than that. In this case, if the final variation of the special figure 2 is a small hit that does not give time saving and there is no special figure 2 reservation, or if the final variation of the special figure 2 does not give time saving and there is no special figure 2 reservation When the small hit RUSH ends.

Also, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special figure 2 changes to the normal state, it is in the second bonus, and in order not to shift to c time reduction during the second bonus, the special figure 2 in the normal state The stop symbol is determined so that the is not stopped in a special mode. On the other hand, in the second time-saving gaming state, so that the small hit RUSH continues with a predetermined probability, the case where the small hit stop mode of the special figure 2 is a special mode is included. In addition, although it is possible to include the case where the stop mode of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a special aspect, the probability of shifting to c time saving during the second bonus is lower than the normal state It is desirable to increase the probability that the special mode will appear in the two-hour-saving game state.

By the way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the b time saving starts, the special figure 1 suspension remains, and the special figure 1 variation is executed in the b time saving state, and during the variation of this special figure 1, the player moves to the right Suppose that two game balls are started and won in the second starting port 3140 by hitting. In this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation is reserved "1", and the special figure 2 fluctuation starts immediately after the special figure 1 stops and the second time saving game state (b time saving) ends, so the second time saving game state ( The special figure 2 variation acquired by the player in b time saving) will be held once.

Therefore, if there is a special 1 hold remaining at the time the b time saving starts, after digesting all the remaining special 1 holds, by switching to right hitting, 2 special 2 fluctuations becomes possible to obtain. However, if the remaining special figure 1 hold contains a big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special figure (number of times of operation n) is reset, so after the big hit game state is completed, it does not move to the b time saving state, and the result As a result, it will not shift to the small hit RUSH.

Therefore, when the special figure 1 reservation remains at the time when the b time saving starts, it is possible to let the player select the game policy at the time of the b time saving start. For example, when the b time saving starts, there are three special 1 reservations remaining, and when the special 1 change is performed and the special 1 reservations become two, the reservation ball notice with relatively high reliability When appears, a policy of digesting the special figure 1 as it is and seeing the result, or a policy of hitting to the right and aiming at both the small hit RUSH and the special figure 1 big hit can be selected.

In addition, the number of fluctuations until the start of the b time saving may be displayed in an effect to notify the player of the b time saving start timing. This makes it possible for the player to easily proceed with the game so that there is no special figure 1 hold at the start of b time saving.

It should be noted that, according to the above-described configuration, when the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), "1200 times" and special figure 2 fluctuation "1200 times" in the sum of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation as the time saving number of times By giving "time", the number of times of time saving is substantially special figure 2 variation "1 time", but it may be "1 time" by summing special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation. As a result, when the number of operations n is reached, if there is a special figure 1 suspension, the second time saving game state (b time saving) will end when the special figure 1 fluctuation starts next time, so the player , It is necessary to hit the right to start the normal figure fluctuation and acquire the special figure 2 reservation. That is, in order to shift to a small hit RUSH, the b time saving is activated at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 when the number of operations n is reached, and the special figure 2 reservation is acquired by striking to the right during the fluctuation There is a need. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game with a sense of urgency. Also, when the special figure fluctuation that reaches the number of times of operation n stops, the second time saving game state (b time saving) may be terminated when there is no special figure 2 hold. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of urgency.

[5-6. Production screen]
97 to 100 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect screens displayed on the display device 3007 in the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 97 shows an effect screen from a normal state to a jackpot game state, transition to a jackpot game state, and transition to the first time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends. In the normal state, the game proceeds with left-handed hitting. is released. The opening of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the time for catching one game ball, and is performed 10 times at long intervals.

In addition, in the normal state, since the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed by winning the first start port 3120A, the display device 3007 includes the special figure 1 identification pattern 3601 for production and the special figure 2 identification pattern for production. 3602, normal figure identification pattern 3603 for production, special figure 1 reservation information 3611, special figure 2 reservation information 3612, general figure reservation information 3613, and other various information and effect images are displayed. The special figure 1 identification pattern 3601 for production is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the display device 3007 so that the player can easily see it. The normal figure identification pattern 3603 for production is displayed below the special figure 1 identification pattern 3601 for production so as to be easily visible to the player. Special figure 1 reserved information 3611 and special figure 2 reserved information 3612 correspond to special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 reserved information 3612 currently fluctuating, and a larger reserved design corresponding to special figure 1 fluctuation It consists of a small reserved design to do. The general pattern reservation information 3613 indicates the number of reservations of the general pattern fluctuation in numbers.

In the normal state, the player hits left, and the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128 and passes through the first start opening 3120A and the normal figure start opening 3220, as shown in FIG. 97(a). When the first identification pattern 3601 for production and the normal identification pattern 3603 for production fluctuate, and the special figure 1 lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the first identification pattern for production 3601 is stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner, and a large reserved symbol is erased. When the normal pattern lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. 97(c), the normal pattern identification pattern 3603 for production is stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the first identification pattern 3601 for effect is stopped and displayed in a detached state, as shown in FIG. It becomes a reserved design, and the variation of the first identification design 3601 for production based on the special figure 1 reserved information 3611 starts.

When the special figure 1 lottery is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 97(d), the first identification pattern 3601 for effect is stop-displayed in a big win mode, and the large reserved pattern is erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 97(e), an image is displayed to inform the transition to the jackpot gaming state (first bonus), and as shown in FIG. An image notifying the number of rounds is displayed. In the jackpot game state, the game is advanced by hitting to the right. In addition, normal pattern fluctuation is also performed in the jackpot game state. However, even if the general pattern is won in the jackpot game state, the general pattern per game is not executed. Also, in the jackpot gaming state, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variations are not executed.

FIG. 97(g) is a display example of the display device 3007 at the end of the jackpot game state. It becomes a probability state, and further suggests to the player to shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 160 time-saving times. In the first time-saving game state, the game is advanced by striking to the right, and the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is a high probability state.

FIG. 97(h) shows a display example of the display device 3007 in the variable probability mode. An image that instructs to hit is displayed. In addition, when the first identification symbol 3601 for effect is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the variable probability mode, the display device 3007 displays the image shown in FIG. In the variable probability mode, when the number of times of time reduction is 160 times, the display device 3007 returns to the image shown in FIG. The image instructing left-handed hitting is performed during one variation from the start to the end of the variation of the first identification symbol 3601 for effect. In the fourth embodiment, the first identification pattern 3601 for the production of the 160th number of times of working hours has ended at the time when the first identification pattern 3601 starts to fluctuate. From the start of the variation of the first identification symbol 3601 to the end of the variation, an effect display may be performed to encourage left-handed hitting, such as "Please hit left-handed."

FIG. 98 shows an effect screen from a normal state to a normal state by winning a general pattern lottery, shifting to a general pattern per game state, and shifting to a general pattern per game state to a normal state. In the normal state, the player hits left, and the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128 and passes through the first start opening 3120A and the normal figure start opening 3220, as shown in FIG. 98(a). Then, the first identification pattern 3601 for production and the normal pattern identification pattern 3603 for production change, and as shown in FIG. When it becomes a mode, the player is notified that he has won the normal figure lottery, and as shown in FIG. bonus). At this time, an image instructing to hit to the right is displayed. Then, when the player hits to the right, the game ball is captured by the normal electric accessory 3146, the second non-electric accessory 3441 is opened, and two game balls enter the second start port 3140 and win. Along with this, two special figure 2 reservation information 3612 are displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 98(c), and the second identification pattern 3602 for production starts to change. Then, as shown in FIG. 98(d), when the second identification pattern 3602 for effect stops in the small win mode, an image suggesting the number of small wins in the normal game state of the first bonus is displayed. do. After that, as the number of small hits increases, the number of small hits displayed on the display device 3007 is updated. As shown, an image indicating the end of the game state per normal pattern (second bonus) called last is displayed. Then, when the game state per normal pattern (second bonus) ends, as shown in FIG. 98(f), the effect screen returns to the normal state. At this time, an image of an instruction to hit to the left is displayed.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the maximum number of small hits in the normal game state (second bonus) is 20 times, but the number of small hits is not necessarily 20 times. For example, the special figure 2 lottery includes a loss, and in the case of a loss, the number of small hits is reduced by the number of times of loss because the small hit game is not executed. It should be noted that, in the general figure per game state (second bonus), the special figure 2 lottery may be all small hits and always be able to win 20 small hits. Also, if the special figure 1 change is being executed at the time of the normal figure, even if you hit the right and get the special figure 2 hold, the special figure 2 variation will start until the special figure 1 variation stops. not. For this reason, even if the normal figure per game is executed, the small hit game is not executed until the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped, so the number of small hits is reduced accordingly. Also, when the special figure 1 variation is executed at the time of the normal figure, when this special figure 1 variation stops in the jackpot mode, the screen of the display device 3007 is the screen shown in FIG. 98 (c) 97(e), the effect display in the jackpot game state is executed. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, the first time saving game state (a time saving) is executed. Here, since the special figure 2 variation is suspended at the start of the first time-saving gaming state, there is a high possibility that a small hit can be obtained by the special figure 2 variation. However, even if the small hit mode at this time is a special mode (for example, odd number arrangement), c time saving does not operate, and a time saving state is continued.

FIG. 99 shows the effect screen before and after shifting to the second time saving game state (b time saving). Figure 99 (a) shows the production screen at the time of the 848th special figure fluctuation, Figure 99 (b) shows the production screen at the time of the 849th special figure fluctuation, to the second time saving game state (b time saving) By performing a countdown display from the time when it reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) before the specified number of times (850 times) to transition, the game indicates that the transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is near. suggest to people. Then, when the specified number of times (850 times) is reached, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), at the same time as the special figure fluctuation starts, as shown in FIG. , and displays an image of an instruction to hit to the right. In addition, before reaching the specified number of times (850 times), it is a normal state, and it is difficult to start winning to the second start port 3140, so at the same time as the special figure 1 fluctuation start, as shown in FIG. 99 (d) , "Small hit RUSH rush" is displayed, after that, when the special figure 1 fluctuation stops, as shown in FIG. At the time point, as shown in FIG. 99(f), "RUSH 1st time" is displayed, and two special figure 2 pending information 3612 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (g), the determination result based on the first special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is notified to the player by the stop mode of the second identification pattern 3602 for production, and then, FIG. 99 ( As shown in h), the determination result based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 is notified to the player by the stop mode of the second identification pattern 3602 for production. Here, when the stop mode of the second identification pattern 3602 is arranged in an odd number, the small hit is won, and the second time saving game state (c time saving) in which the number of time saving of "1 time" is given after the small winning game is completed. Transition. Thus, the stop mode of the odd-numbered second identification symbols 3602 is an example of a special mode. When the stop mode of the second identification pattern 3602 is arranged in an even number, the small hit is won, and the game state after the end of the small hit game does not change. Since the stop mode of the 2nd identification pattern 3602 for production|presentation shown in FIG.99(h) is a special mode, if special figure 2 reservation can be acquired by time saving of "once", small hit RUSH can be continued. Therefore, "Continue" and an image suggesting that the small winning RUSH can be continued are also displayed.

If the special figure 2 hold can be acquired during the display screen shown in FIG. 99 (h), as shown in FIG. Is displayed. After that, the small hit RUSH continues by the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 reservation information 3612 becomes a special mode, FIG. is shown. As shown in FIGS. 99(d) to 99(h), FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b), during the small hit RUSH, the image display of the instruction to hit to the right is continued. Here, after the special figure 2 starts to fluctuate in the second time saving game state (b time saving), when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed, the second time saving game state (b time saving) is finished Normal state However, as shown in FIG. 99(g), the image display of the instruction to hit to the right continues.

If the stop mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second special figure 2 pending information 3612 does not become a special mode, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a small hit that is not, "End" is displayed at the same time as the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped, and after the small hit game ends, the normal state effect screen returns as shown in FIG. 100(d). At this time, an image of an instruction to hit to the left is displayed. The image instructing the left-handed shot is produced during one variation from the start to the end of the variation of the second identification symbol 3602 .

It should be noted that, if the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 pending information 3612 does not become a special aspect, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the special figure 2 variation There is a case where the stop mode is not a special mode. In this case, "end" is displayed simultaneously with the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and as shown in FIG. 100(d), the effect screen returns to the normal state. It should be noted that, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop mode of the special figure 2 variation based on the second special figure 2 pending information 3612 is not a special mode, a variation pattern with a long variation time of the special figure 2 is selected, During the period from when the second identification symbol 3602 for effect starts to change to when it ends, an effect display may be performed to urge left-hand hitting, such as "Please hit left."

[5-7. Effects of the Fourth Pachinko Machine]
According to the fourth pachinko game machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fourth pachinko game machine, it is equipped with b time saving and c time saving, and when the normal electric accessory 3146 catches the game ball in the b time saving and c time saving states, it becomes an open state, and two in the open state A second non-electric accessory 3441 that is closed when the game ball wins is provided in the second start port 3140, and when the stop mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a special mode, a small hit and once after a small winning game Equipped with a function that gives a reduction in working hours. As a result, one time reduction is given when the specified number of fluctuations are digested and the b time reduction is entered, and the player may be able to acquire two special figure 2 fluctuations in this one time reduction. . There is a high possibility that two small hit games can be obtained with these two special figure 2 fluctuations, and if the second small hit mode is a special mode, one time reduction is given, so two small hits again The possibility of winning a winning game increases. In this way, by performing the special figure variation up to the specified number of times, it becomes possible to acquire a small hit RUSH, and if the second small hit mode is a special mode, the small hit RUSH continues, a new It is possible to provide a game ball with interest to a player.

Also, during the small winning RUSH, when the game ball is captured by the normal electric accessory 3146, the game is interrupted while the second non-electric accessory 3411 is open by stopping the shooting of the game ball. can be done. Then, right-handed hitting is performed again, the game ball is captured by the second non-electrical accessory 3411 to start the special figure 2 fluctuation, and if the second special figure 2 fluctuation stops in a special mode, the small hit RUSH is continued. be able to. In this way, by keeping the second non-electric role product 3411 in the open state, it becomes possible to interrupt the game even during the small winning RUSH, and to take a restroom break.

In addition, during the small hit RUSH, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by one small hit game due to the special figure 2 fluctuation is 150, and the player can obtain 300 prize balls by continuing one small hit RUSH. is available. For this reason, depending on the number of continuations of the small winning RUSH, there is a possibility that more prize balls than the first bonus or the second bonus can be acquired once. Thus, in the fourth pachinko game machine, it is possible to improve interest in the small winning RUSH that is executed when the specified number of fluctuations are completed. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by winning the special figure 1 lottery and moving to the big hit game state, and in the second time-saving game state, most of them are small by the special figure 2 lottery. Prize balls can be obtained little by little by winning a winning game and shifting to a small winning game state. In this way, since the profits given to the player are different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to provide time-saving game states with different game characteristics.

In addition, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, by winning the normal figure lottery in the normal state, the second bonus that can expect a larger number of prize balls than the first bonus (jackpot game state with special figure 1 jackpot) transition to As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the general drawing lottery more interesting.

Although the fourth pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has been described above, the fourth pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the interval time for each opening of the normal electric accessory 3146 is configured to include the playing time for the small win, but it is not limited to this. It may be set to include the game time and the like due to the big win in addition to the win. Specifically, as the jackpot game, the opening and closing operation of the jackpot game is performed for two rounds or more, and after the jackpot game ends, the number of times of opening is increased by including the jackpot that shifts to a normal state without a low probability of reducing working hours. You may make it feel like As a result, it is possible to continuously execute a performance by treating a plurality of big wins as one big win based on one winning of the normal pattern, and it is possible to expect to give many balls at a time.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, after entering the central ball entrance 3128, a crew dish 3210 including a special figure 1 and a normal figure start opening is provided, and a special figure 1 and a normal figure are drawn at the same time in the normal state. However, the structure is not limited to this, and a crew including a special figure 2, an ordinary electric accessory, a large winning opening, a general winning opening, an out opening, etc., or a combination thereof may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, two balls can enter the second non-electric role 3411 for one winning (1 opening) to the normal electric role 3146, and two balls can enter the second non-electric role 3411. It is assumed that the ball is closed by entering the ball, but it is not limited to this, and one ball can be entered for each winning (1 opening) to the ordinary electric accessory 3146, and the closing is performed by winning one. A non-electric accessory that causes the first starting port 3121B or the second starting port 3140 to start and win, or a configuration combining them may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when a big hit occurs while one set of normal electric accessories 3146 is being opened 10 times, regardless of the operating state of the normal electric accessories 3146, the state shifts to the big win game state. Therefore, a configuration may be provided in which the opening operation is continued. In this case, after the transition to the big hit, the normal electric accessory 3146 and the second non-electric accessory 3411 are opened in the same way as before the transition to the big hit, but unlike before the transition to the big hit, the second non-electric accessory 3411 is entered. The variation and the small hit operation by the second starting port 3140 may not be performed. Also, the special figure suspension based on the ball entering the normal electric accessory 3146 is not digested during the big win, but is digested after the big win is finished. Also, in a pachinko game machine equipped with non-electrical accessories that support winning, electric accessories may be used in place of the non-electrical accessories.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, it is assumed that the time saving ends at the same time as the special figure fluctuation starts, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving ends at the end of the fluctuation, at a specific timing during the fluctuation, or , or a combination thereof.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, in the small hit RUSH state, it is configured to go back and forth between the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and the time saving state that changes the special figure 2 is always a right-handed notification. , Specifications for switching between right-handed notification and left-handed notification according to the state, or a configuration combining them may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, most of the results of the special figure 2 lottery result in small wins, and there is a low probability of losing. After the end of the big win game, including the big win of 1 bonus, the small win RUSH may be ended by shifting to the variable probability and short time a.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the small hit stop mode due to the special figure 2 fluctuation includes a special mode that shifts to c time reduction, but the loss stop mode due to the special figure 2 fluctuation shifts to c time reduction It may include a special mode to do.

[6. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 type of pachinko machine called digipachi, and like the first pachinko machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are parallel. It is a pachinko game machine capable of variable display.

Hereinafter, in explaining the fifth pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 4184 (see FIG. 46) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, , Hall computer 4186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine in terms of function, shape, arrangement position, etc. We shall omit the explanation as much as possible.

In describing the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configurations described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the fifth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko game machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

In describing the fifth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configurations described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the fourth pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[6-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 101, the game board unit 4010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 4010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) as in the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 4010, a game area 4105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

Various members (for example, the first starting port 4120A, etc.) arranged in the game area 4105 of the second pachinko machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 101, the game board unit 4010 mainly includes a game panel 4100 in which a game area 4105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 4110, and a guide rail 4110, and a guide rail 4110 and a guide rail 4110, center accessory 4115, first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, general prize winning port 4122, passage gate unit 4125, special electric accessory unit 4130, second starting port 4140, normal electric role It includes an object unit 4145, an LED unit 4160, an out port 4178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 4160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this fifth pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 4100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 4007 . A guide rail 4110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 4100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 4110 toward the game area 4105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 4105 while changing the traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 4100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 4100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 4100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 4100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 4110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 4105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 4110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 4006 (see FIG. 102 described later) to the upper part of the game area 4105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 4115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 4100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 4116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 4105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 4116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 4105 by the shooting device 4006 flows down the left area 4106 or the right area 4107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 4106 or the right side area 4107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 4100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 4106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 4107 .

In addition, the center accessory 4115 is formed with a warp entrance 4117 in which a game ball flowing down the left area 4106 can enter at the left outer peripheral edge. A game ball entering the warp entrance 4117 is configured to be guided to a stage 4118 formed in the center accessory 4115 . The stage 4118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 4007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 4118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 4119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 4118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 4119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 4117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 4117 but did not enter the chance entrance 4119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 4120A.

(First start port)
The first starting port 4120A is arranged below the display area of the display device 4007, and is arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 4120A, it is detected by the first starting port switch 4121A (see FIG. 102 described later). Also, a first starting port 4120B is arranged in the right area 4107 of the display device 4007, and a game ball struck to the right can win the first starting port 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting port 4120B, it is detected by the first starting port switch 4121B (see FIG. 102 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B is detected by the first starting port switches 4121A and 4121B (see FIG. 102 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting ports 4120A and 4120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start ports 4120A and 4120B is not limited to this.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 4122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 4007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 4122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 4123 (see FIG. 102 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 4122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 4123 (see FIG. 102 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 4122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 4122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 4125 is arranged in the right area 4107, and includes a passing gate 4126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 4126. 4127 (see FIG. 102 to be described later) is integrated with the unit body, which is arranged in the right side area 4107 and configured so that a game ball hit to the right almost passes through. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 4126 is detected, the starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 4127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate unit 4125, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 4125 may be located in the left region 4106 instead of or in addition to the right region 4107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric role product unit 4130 integrates a big winning hole 4131, a count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning hole 4131, and a special electric role product 4133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 4130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 4125 in the right area 4107 .

The big winning opening 4131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large winning hole 4131, a large winning hole that can win a left-handed game ball can be arranged, or a game can be played in the upper part of the center accessory 4115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 4131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when controlled to a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 4131 is detected by the count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102 described later), for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 4131 is not limited to 15 pieces.

The special electric accessory 4133 includes a special electric shutter 4134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 4135 (see FIG. 102 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 4134 . The special electric accessory 4133, that is, the special electric shutter 4134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 4131, and it is impossible for game balls to enter (passing through) the large winning opening 4131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 4131 shifts from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. state.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 4140 is located in the left region 4106 (more specifically, below the first starting port 4120A). However, the second starting port 4140 is such that the game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second starting port 4140 by the game nail so that either the left-handed game ball or the right-handed game ball can win a prize. is configured to However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 4140 as described above, and it may be provided in the right region 4107 so that, for example, a right-handed game ball can win. In addition, the second starting port 4140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, it is detected by a second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 102 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 4140 is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 (see FIG. 102 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the starting condition is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 4140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 4140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 4145 is arranged in the right area 4107 (more specifically, directly under the passage gate 4126 and above the special electric accessory 4133), and when the game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of games are played. It is a unit body in which a prize winning hole from which balls are paid out as prize balls, a switch for detecting winning of a game ball to this winning hole, and an ordinary electric accessory 4146 are integrated. In the fifth pachinko game machine, the winning opening is the second starting opening 4140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 4141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 4146 includes a tongue-shaped movable member 4147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 4148 (see FIG. 102 described later) that operates the movable member 4147 for ordinary electricity. Ordinary electric accessory 4146, that is, ordinary electric movable member 4147, is an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 4140, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 4140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. The open state is a state in which the general electric movable member 4147 protrudes, and the game ball riding on the general electric movable member 4147 moves to the second starting port 4140 . The closed state is a state in which the movable member 4147 for general electricity is retracted, and the game ball passes in front of the movable member 4147 for general electricity. Instead of the general electric movable member 4147, which is a so-called electric chute, for example, a shutter that can be rotated in the front-rear direction may be employed.

(out port)
The out port 4178 is shot toward the game area 4105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 4120, the second starting port 4140, the big winning port 4131, the general winning port 4122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 4178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 4105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 4178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 4122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 4105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 4010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 4100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 4007 and has a group 4058 of performance accessories such as movable accessories controlled by the sub-control circuit 4300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 4058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[6-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 102, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 102 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 102, the fifth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 4200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 4300 , a payout/fire control circuit 4400 , and a power supply circuit 4450 .

[6-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 4200 includes a main CPU 4201, a main ROM 4202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 4203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 4204, a backup capacitor 4207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

A main ROM 4202 , a main RAM 4203 , an initial reset circuit 4204 and the like are connected to the main CPU 4201 . The main CPU 4201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 4202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 4201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 4201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 4202 .

The main RAM 4203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 4203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 4201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 4201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 4204 monitors the main CPU 4201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 4207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 4203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 4200 has an I/O port 4205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 4206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 4300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 4200 . For example, the main control circuit 4200 includes a normal symbol display portion 4161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 4162, a first special symbol display portion 4163, a second special symbol display portion 4164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 4165, a 2 special symbol holding display portion 4166, general electric solenoid 4148, special electric solenoid 4135 and the like are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 4200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 4170, an error notification monitor 4172, and the like. Main control circuitry 4200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 4205 .

The performance display monitor 4170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 4201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 4172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 4172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting changing pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 4200 are the first starter switches 4121A and 4121B, the second starter switch 4141, the passage gate switch 4127, the count switch 4132, the general winning switch 4123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 4200 via I/O port 4205 .

Further, the main control circuit 4200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 4186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 4184, a setting key 4174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in the main RAM 4203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 4176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 4176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too. In addition, in the present embodiment, the total value of the special figure 1 variation frequency and the special figure 1 variation frequency and the special figure 2 variation frequency are externally output, but the special figure 2 variation frequency is not output externally.

Also, the setting key 4174 and backup clear switch 4176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island facility using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 4174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 4176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 are connected to the main control circuit 4200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 .

[6-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 4300 includes a sub CPU 4301, a program ROM 4302, a work RAM 4303, a display control circuit 4304, an audio control circuit 4305, an LED control circuit 4306, a character control circuit 4307, a command input port 4308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 4300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 4200 . Although not shown in FIG. 102, the sub-control circuit 4300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 4302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the fifth pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 4301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 4301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 4302 . In particular, the sub CPU 4301 performs control related to game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 4200 .

A work RAM 4303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 4301 .

A display control circuit 4304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 4007 . The display control circuit 4304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 4304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 4301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 4304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 4007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 4007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 4007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 4304 can control the display device 4007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 4305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 4032 . The audio control circuit 4305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 4032 . The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 4301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 4032 .

The LED control circuit 4306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 4046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 4306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 4307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 4058). The role item control circuit 4307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 4307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to a role product operation command from the sub CPU 4301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 4301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 4308 is connected to command output port 4206 and receives various commands transmitted from main control circuit 4200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 4180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 4200, the payout/launch control circuit 4400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 4082 and controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 4182 is connected to the card unit 4180 . The ball lending operation panel 4182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (neither shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 4180 . The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 4180 . Although the operation panel 4182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 4180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 4400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 4450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 4200, the sub-control circuit 4300, the payout/launch control circuit 4400, and the like.

A power switch 4095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 4450 . The power switch 4095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 4200, the sub-control circuit 4300, the payout/launch control circuit 4400, etc.).

[6-3. Basic specifications of the fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described.

[Big hit, small hit probability]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, there is almost no "lose" in both the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the specifications are such that a small win or a big win can easily be won. For example, the probability of determining a big hit in the first and second special symbol lotteries is about 1/319 in a low probability state and about 1/99 in a high probability state. The probability of small hit determination in the first and second special symbol lotteries is about 317/319 in the low probability state and about 97/99 in the high probability state. Therefore, in the first and second special symbol lotteries, the probability of deviation determination is about 1/319 in the low probability state and about 1/99 in the high probability state.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the number of prize balls due to start winning to the first start ports 4120A, 4120B and the second start port 4140 is 4, the number of prize balls due to winning to the big winning port 4131 is 15, general The number of winning balls to the winning opening 4122 is 10, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 10 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the high-accuracy short-time game state with a probability of 100%. Both the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are 160 times, and when 160 times of the time saving number of times are digested, the state returns to the normal state.

One round in the jackpot game state ends when 10 game balls enter the jackpot 4131 or when the jackpot 4131 remains open for about 30 seconds. In the small winning game state, the big winning hole 4131 is opened for a short time, but it is difficult to win a prize, and when the game is played with the left hand and the small winning is won, the game ball wins the big prize even if the game is switched to the right hand. It is closed before reaching port 4131 .

[time reduction number of times]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, at least b is installed among the above-mentioned a time saving, b time saving and c time saving. When the special figure fluctuation frequency in the case of the jackpot lottery being in a low probability state reaches the operation frequency n (for example, 750 times), b time saving is activated.

[Variation pattern of special symbols]
The special symbol variation pattern is determined based on a special symbol variation pattern table. The special symbol variation pattern table includes a special symbol variation pattern table for low start referred to in the normal game state and a special symbol variation pattern table for high start referred to in the time reduction game state. The special symbol variation pattern table for start and the special symbol variation pattern table for high start include tables for the first special symbol and tables for the second special symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the variation of the second special symbol is a long variation of, for example, 580 to 600 seconds regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the special figure 1 jackpot case. It is set significantly longer than the variation time of 1 special symbol (for example, 95 seconds at the longest). If the special figure 1 lottery is a small hit or a deviation, most of them (for example, 90%) are selected for a variation pattern of about 1 second.

In the special symbol variation pattern table for high start, the special symbol variation time when the result of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 lottery is a small hit or a loss is set longer than the special symbol variation time when it is a big hit. there is For example, the special figure variation time in the case of a small hit or a loss is set to 1 second, and the special figure variation time in the case of a big hit is set to 0.5 seconds.

[6-4. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 of the main control circuit 4200 relating to the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. Various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 are common to various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 related to the first pachinko game machine described with reference to FIGS. There are many processes, but they are different in the following points.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, in the game state management process of the first pachinko game machine shown in S111 of FIG. A process is added to turn on the b time-saving flag, which indicates that the

Also, the fifth pachinko game machine executes the processing performed in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a big win, the special electric accessory 1133 is driven to open the big winning opening 1131 for big wins, and in the case of a small win, the solenoid 1154 for small wins is driven. However, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 4201 drives the special electric accessory 4133 to open the big winning opening 4131 for the big winning in both the big winning and the small winning. is controlled to open.

Other processes executed by the main CPU 4201 in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those in the first pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, description of other processes executed by the main CPU 4201 is omitted.

[6-5. Sub control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 will be described. Various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 execute various processes executed by the sub CPU 4301 related to the first pachinko game machine described with reference to FIG. Particularly, in the fifth pachinko game machine, command analysis processing shown in FIG. 103 is executed.

(Command analysis processing)
The subroutine (command analysis processing) executed in S323 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG.

In S4110, processing is performed to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this processing, the sub CPU 4301 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer. If not, terminate this subroutine.

In S4120, a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol game end command is performed. In this process, when the sub CPU 4301 determines that it is a special symbol game end command, it moves the process to S4130, and when it does not determine that it is a special symbol game end command, it moves the process to S4140.

At S4130, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing when receiving a special symbol game end command shown in FIG.
In S4140, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing according to the received command. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the special symbol game end command reception process, first, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a variable probability state (S4210). If it is determined to be in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to S4260. If it is determined not to be in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to S4220.

In S4220, the process of updating the low probability special figure fluctuation counter. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs the process of adding "1" to the value of the predetermined area of the work RAM 4303 that functions as a low probability special figure variation counter. That is, the value of the low probability Toku-zu fluctuation counter is updated when Toku-zu 1 fluctuation and Toku-zu 2 fluctuation stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S4230.

In S4230, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing for determining whether or not the game of special figure 1 has ended. If it is determined that the special figure 1 game has ended, the process is moved to S4240. If it is not determined that the special figure 1 game has ended, the process is moved to S4250.

In S4240, a process of updating the low probability characteristic figure 1 fluctuation counter is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of adding "1" to the value in a predetermined area of the work RAM 4303 that functions as a low probability characteristic figure 1 variation count counter. That is, the value of the low probability Toku-zu fluctuation counter is updated when Toku-zu 1 fluctuation has stopped, and is not updated when Toku-zu 2 fluctuation has stopped. When this process ends, the process moves to S4250.

At S4250, a process for setting the change count display effect and the ceiling suggestion effect is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 4301 performs a process of setting the value of the low probability characteristic figure 1 variation counter to be displayed on the display device 4007 . In addition, the sub CPU4301, depending on the difference between the number of operations n (for example, 750 times) for rushing into b time saving and the value of the low probability special figure fluctuation counter, suggests how much it is until b time saving rush Ceiling suggestion Perform processing to set the production. For example, a star is displayed on the display device 4007 as a ceiling indication effect, and if the difference number is 750 to 551, it is white, if it is 550 to 351, it is blue, if it is 350 to 151, it is yellow, and if it is 150 to 51, it is purple. , 50 to 11, red, and 10 to 1, rainbow color. When this process ends, the process moves to S4260.

In S4260, the sub CPU 4301 also performs processing executed when receiving a special symbol game end command. For example, when it is a big hit, the process of resetting the low probability special figure fluctuation counter and the low probability special figure 1 fluctuation counter is performed. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[6-6. Production screen]
105 and 106 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the fifth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 105(a) shows an example of a production screen displayed on the display device 4007 in a normal state, and the display device 4007 includes special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production and special figure 1 reservation information 4611. And, the variation frequency information 4621 that informs the variation frequency of the special figure 1 in the low probability state (non-probability variation state), and the suggestive information 4622 that suggests the remaining variation frequency until reaching the b time saving, various production images including Is displayed. In the normal state, it is possible to win to the first start port 4120A and the second start port 4140, special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation in the first special symbol display unit 4163 or the second special symbol display unit 4164 is done. On the other hand, the display device 4007 displays a special figure 1 identification symbol 4601 for production corresponding to the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 4163, but is displayed by the second special symbol display unit 4164. The special symbol for production corresponding to the second special symbol to be played and the reserved information are not displayed.

The special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the display device 4007 so that the player can easily see it. The special figure 1 reserved information 4611 consists of a large reserved design corresponding to the currently fluctuating special figure 1 fluctuation and a small reserved design corresponding to the reserved special figure 1 fluctuation.

The change number information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 are images of the change number display effect and the ceiling suggestion effect that are set in the processing shown in S4250 of FIG. In FIG. 105(a), the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production is fluctuating, and by visually recognizing the fluctuation frequency information 4621, it can be seen that the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed 600 times. In addition, since the color of the star that is the suggestion information 4622 is purple, it can be seen that the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the b time saving is 150 to 51.

Thus, in the normal state, the display device 4007 performs the effect display related to the special figure 1, and the information about the special figure 2 lottery is hidden.

By the way, in the normal state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is significantly longer than the variation time of the special figure 1, so when the special figure 1 variation stops, there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 is fluctuating. In addition, since most of the lottery results of special figures 1 and 2 are small hits, the special figure 1 fluctuation stops and becomes a small hit, so even if the special figure 2 fluctuation is a big hit It is forcibly stopped in a disengaged manner. Conversely, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops in the small hit mode, if the special figure 1 is in fluctuation, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is forcibly stopped in the off mode. Therefore, if there is both special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending, after stopping special figure 1 and special figure 2, start fluctuation at the same timing, special figure 1 fluctuation stops first Most of the time.

In other words, when the special figure 1 is stopped fluctuation, the variation of the special figure 2 is forced to stop in the manner of deviation, so in the process of updating the low certainty special figure fluctuation counter shown in S4220 of FIG. 104, the low certainty special The value of the figure fluctuation number counter is increased by "2", and in the process of updating the low probability characteristic figure 1 fluctuation number counter shown in S4240, the value of the low probability characteristic figure 1 fluctuation number counter is increased by "1". Since the fluctuation number information 4621 notified to the player is the value of the low probability special figure 1 fluctuation number counter, the special figure fluctuation number (special figure 1 fluctuation number and special figure 2 and the sum of the number of fluctuations).

In the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), it is assumed that the special figure 2 variation has been performed 99 times. In this case, when the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production during fluctuation stops with a small hit or a loss, as shown in FIG. switch to red. By further stacking the number of special figure fluctuations by the player, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the color of the asterisk, which is the suggestion information 4622, changes to a rainbow color, and the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching b time saving is reported to be small. Then, the player, by stacking the number of special figure fluctuations several times, as shown in FIG. A display prompting right-handed hitting is displayed. In addition, according to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, since the game state is switched at the start of the special figure fluctuation, the 750th special figure fluctuation is completed, and at the start of the next special figure fluctuation "Ceiling mode start" and " "Right shot" is displayed.

FIG. 105(e) shows an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the b time saving state (ceiling mode), and the display device 4007 includes a special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for effect, and an effect Special figure 2 identification pattern 4602, special figure 1 reservation information 4611, special figure 2 reservation information 4612, and various effect images including are displayed. In the b time saving state (ceiling mode), it is possible to win the first start port 4120A and the second start port 4140, and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 4163 on the display device 4007 Special figure 1 identification design 4601 for production corresponding to and special figure 2 identification design 4602 for production corresponding to the second special design displayed by the second special design display unit 4164 are displayed. In addition, in b time saving state (ceiling mode), the change frequency information 4621 and suggestion information 4622 which were displayed in the normal state are not displayed.

By the way, in the b time saving state (ceiling mode), the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) when the result of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lottery is a small hit or a loss is the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds). For this reason, when the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production and the special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for production start to fluctuate at the same time, the fluctuation of the big hit stops first, and the fluctuation of the big hit is lost by the small hit. It is possible to reduce the forced stop in the mode.

As shown in FIG. 105 (e), the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production and the special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for production fluctuate at the same time, and when one of the fluctuations stops with a small hit, FIG. As shown in f), when one variation stops with a small hit, the other variation stops with a loss. A special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for performance and a special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for performance fluctuate at the same time, and if one of the fluctuations stops first due to a big hit, the other fluctuation stops immediately afterward in a disjointed manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), first, when the special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for production stops in a jackpot mode, the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production stops immediately after or simultaneously in a losing mode. . Then, as shown in FIG. 106(b), after announcing the big win, the state shifts to the big win game state. In the fifth pachinko game machine, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable state and a time-saving game state) with 160 time-saving times. When 160 times of shortening of working hours are digested, it shifts to a normal state.

Figure 106 (c), Figure 106 (d) shows an example of the effect screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the high probability time-saving game state of 160 times of time-saving number of times, the display device 4007, Special figure 1 identification pattern 4601, special figure 2 identification pattern 4602 for production, special figure 1 reservation information 4611, special figure 2 reservation information 4612, and various effects images including are displayed. Figure 106 (e) shows an example of the effect screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the next special figure variation after the high probability time saving game state is completed by digesting the time saving number of times 160 times. 2 identification pattern 4602 and special figure 2 reservation information 4612 are erased, and variation frequency information 4621 and suggestion information 4622 are displayed. The change number information 4621 at this time is "0". Then, after the special figure 1 identification pattern 4601 for production is changed and stopped and a small hit or a loss is notified, the change number information 4621 becomes "1" as shown in FIG. 106(f). After that, the game is executed in the normal state.

In addition, when both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 become a big hit fluctuation, the special figure given priority in the processing order on the program is stopped as a big hit regardless of the fluctuation time, and the other special figure is lost and stopped. When both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are small hits and are stopped at the same time, the special figure given priority in the processing order on the program is stopped, and the other special figure is removed and stopped.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine described above, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state is shifted to a high-accuracy time-saving game state with a time-saving number of times of 160 times. Probability state (variable probability state), 161st to 210th times are low probability state (non-variable probability state). Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state from 161st to 210th, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are assumed to be longer than the big hit variation time. For example, the loss/small hit variation time is 1 second, and the big hit variation time is 60 seconds. As a result, when one of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 fluctuations stops with a small hit, the other can be stopped and stopped, and when one of them is a big hit, it can be stopped. In other words, by creating a time-saving gaming state in which 50 times of big hits are not won, it is possible to earn the number of special figure fluctuations up to b time-saving rush in a short time. In addition, although the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state is a time-saving state, it does not win a predetermined number of times in the c time-saving state, including a special mode that can shift to the time-saving gaming state (c time-saving state) in a small hit or losing stop mode. A time saving game may be executed. As a result, it is possible to further earn the number of special figure fluctuations up to b time saving rush in a short time.

Moreover, you may determine the number of times of time saving of a time saving and c time saving by random number lottery from several times. For example, you may determine one time-saving frequency|count of a time-saving from 160 times, 210 times, and 909 times (160 times+749 times). If 909 times is selected, after 160 high-probability time-saving gaming states are completed, 749 times of big hits are not won by the time-saving gaming state. After the end of the highly reliable time-saving game state, it is promised to shift to b time-saving in a short time.

[6-7. Effects of the Fifth Pachinko Machine]
According to the fifth pachinko game machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fifth pachinko game machine, simultaneous variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is possible, and in the effect display by the display device 4007 in the low probability state before reaching b time saving, effect display of special figure 1 variation And by displaying the special figure 1 fluctuation number and not displaying the special figure 2 fluctuation effect display and the special figure 2 fluctuation number, a difference is created between the actual special figure fluctuation number and the number of fluctuations to be displayed, and the player It is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of times of fluctuation (number of times of ceiling) until b time reduction is reached. As a result, the player can feel that the time until reaching the b time saving is short.

In addition, the results of the special 1 and 2 lotteries are mostly big hits or small hits, and there are very few losses, and since the special 2 is a long fluctuation in the normal state, when the special 2 is fluctuating The special figure 1 is often stopped, and the special figure 2 is forced to stop in a disengaged manner by the stop of the special figure 1. At this time, the special figure 1 fluctuation number and the special figure 2 fluctuation number increase at the same time, but the special figure 1 fluctuation number is produced and the special figure 2 fluctuation number is not produced. As a result, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special figure fluctuations and the number of fluctuations to be displayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations (ceiling number of times) until reaching b time reduction.

In addition, a time reduction and c time reduction are installed, and both the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are set so that the variation time of the big win is much longer than the variation time of the small win or loss during the time saving. For this reason, when one of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation stops with a small hit, even if the other one is a big hit, it will be stopped. Moreover, since the change time of the small hit or the loss is relatively short, the time-saving state in which the big win is unlikely to occur is executed a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to stack a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations in a short time, and as a result, it is possible to earn the number of fluctuations (ceiling number) until reaching b time saving, so that the player can reach b time saving can make the time feel shorter.

In addition, in the case of rushing into b time saving, the variation time of the big win is set to be shorter than the variation time of the small win or loss. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lottery is a big win, the big win tends to stop the special figure first, so that it is possible to shift to the big win game state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the big hit is set to 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the small hit or loss is set to be short, for example, 1 second, the special lottery is quickly completed after the b rush.

Although the fifth pachinko game machine has been described above, it is also possible to partially change the fifth pachinko game machine described above. For example, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the first starting port 4120A and the second starting port 4140 are arranged separately, but the so-called navel winning game ball is placed in the first starting port 4120A. A mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the second starting port 4140 may be provided. As a result, in the normal state, the opportunity to change the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time increases, so after stopping the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changed at the same time. There are more opportunities to start, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is often forced to stop in a different manner. As a result, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special figure fluctuations and the number of fluctuations to be displayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations (ceiling number of times) until b time reduction is reached.

Further, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the game ball that has won the normal electric role 4146 wins the first start port 4120B, but the game ball that has won the normal electric role 4146 is the first start. A prize may be awarded by distributing to the opening and the second starting opening. As a result, the special figure 1 stop and the special figure 2 are stopped at the same time on the occasion of the small hit or the loss, and the opportunity to start the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time increases, resulting in a time-saving game state. It is possible to quickly digest the number of time reductions in. As a result, it is possible to earn the number of fluctuations (ceiling number of times) until reaching b time saving, so that the player can feel that the time until b time saving is reached is short. It is also possible to apply the starting winning accessory unit 3150 installed in the fourth pachinko game machine. In this case, during the time when the normal electric accessory is in the open state, by changing the allocation of the time when the sorting device is on and off, the frequency of winning the first start opening and the second start opening can be changed. becomes possible. For example, if the time when the sorting device is turned on and the time when it is turned off are the same, the special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension will increase in the same way, the time when the sorting device is on is short, When the time to be turned off is long, the special figure 1 reservation is likely to increase and the special figure 2 reservation is difficult to increase. Thus, it becomes possible to adjust the extension of the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 that is not displayed on the display device 4007 during time saving. In addition, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, although the number of times of operation n does not include the number of fluctuations in the high probability state (probability variable state), inclusion is not excluded. Specifically, after changing 160 times in the high probability time saving state, it is changed 590 times in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), and when the total reaches 750 times, the ceiling time saving (b time saving) is activated. may

[6-8. Modification of the fifth pachinko machine]
A modification of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described below.

[6-8-1. Modification 1]
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the game board unit of Modification 1 of the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit of Modification 1 is the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. is configured to pass through the second starting port 4140 .

[Specifications of Modification 1]
Modification 1, the gaming state, regardless of whether the probability variable state (high probability state) or non-probability variable state (low probability state), on the condition that the special figure fluctuation has digested the specified number of times, the time-saving gaming state (b time saving). In modification 1, it shifts to the time saving game state (b time saving) on the condition that the special figure fluctuation has been digested 100 times. In this time-saving game state (b time-saving), for example, 60 time-saving times are given.

When a jackpot is won in a special figure 1 lottery in a low probability state, the game machine shifts to a jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state ends, in most cases, it shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (variable latent probability). In the special figure 1 lottery in the high probability state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than in the low probability state, but in most cases, the game shifts to a high probability non-time-saving game state (variable latent probability). Also, in the special figure 1 lottery in a high probability state, a small hit is won with a high probability. The high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latency probability variation) continues until the number of fluctuations of the special figure reaches 100 times.

When a jackpot win is won in a special figure 2 lottery in a low probability state, the game machine shifts to a jackpot game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be acquired, and after the jackpot game state is completed, shifts to a high probability short-time game state. This high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, for example, when the special figure fluctuation is digested 160 times.

[Modification 1 Game State Transition]
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in Modification 1. In the normal game state, the game proceeds by hitting left. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in the first hit, that is, in a normal game state, most of the cases shift to a high-probability non-time-saving game state (variable latent probability) after the jackpot game ends. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (latency probability variation), the game is advanced by hitting left. When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (latency probability variable), the state is shifted to the high-probability non-time-saving game state (latency probability variable) after the big win game is completed. At this time, the count value of the number of special figure fluctuations until reaching b time saving is reset. When a special figure 1 small hit is won in a high-probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability variation), the game state shifts to a small-hit game state. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability variable), when the special figure 1 big hit or small win is won, the game ball is passed through the big winning opening 4131, and after the big win game or the small win game is finished. , switch to left-handed. In the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latency probability variation), it is easy to win a small hit, so it is in a state of so-called small hit RUSH, so that the number of game balls does not increase in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latency probability variation). (Base value about 95) Small hit probability is set. In addition, in the high probability non-time-saving game state (latency probability variation), mainly special figure 1 variation as left strike digestion, but it may be mainly special figure 2 variation as right strike digestion. Moreover, there is no small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery may try to win a small hit with a high probability.

When the count value of the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability non-time-saving game state reaches 100 times, it shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state and b time-saving is activated. In Modification 1, 60 times of working hours are given, but this is not the case. In the b time-saving state, the game proceeds by hitting to the right, and when the b time-saving is activated, an image such as “right hitting” is displayed on the display device 4007 to prompt the player to hit to the right. When the special figure 2 jackpot is won in the b time saving state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state, and after winning many prize balls, the state is shifted to the high probability time saving game state. When 60 times of time saving are consumed in the time saving state b, the state shifts to the normal game state.

When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in a high-probability short-time game state, the state is shifted to a high-probability short-time game state after a large number of prize balls are acquired in the big-win game state. When 160 times of time saving are consumed in the high-probability time saving game state, it shifts to the normal game state.

That is, according to the modification 1, how quickly 100 times in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation) is digested to shift to the time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), and the time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) and Winning a big hit is the key to winning a large number of prize balls. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine in which the interest of the game is given to the transition from the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the low-probability short-time gaming state (b time-saving).

[6-8-2. Modification 2]
Next, modification 2 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Since the game board unit of Modification 2 is similar to the game board unit 4010 of Modification 1 shown in FIG. 107, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 2]
In Modification 2, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lottery jackpot probabilities are common, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. When a big win is won in special figure 1 or special figure 2 lottery, after the big win game is finished, the state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variable state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving). Specifically, the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times shift to a high probability time saving game state of 160 times, and when the 160 times of time saving number of times are digested, the normal game state is changed.

In addition, modification 2 is equipped with a b time saving function, and the number of time saving times given when entering b time saving ( It is set so that the number of times of shortening of working hours N) is large. Specifically, the number of operations n is 750 times, and the number of times of time reduction N is 800 times. It should be noted that the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of reduced working hours digested in the first reduced working hours game state (a reduced working hours).

[Modification 2 Game State Transition]
FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of Modification 2. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in a normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a high probability time-saving game state with 160 times of time-saving times. In the high probability time-saving game state, the game is advanced by hitting to the right, and the special figure 2 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in a normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a high probability time-saving game state with 160 times of time-saving times. In the high-probability time-saving game state, when the number of times of time-saving 160 times is consumed, the state is shifted to the normal game state.

In the normal game state, on the condition that the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 750 times, the game state shifts to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) of the low-probability time-saving game state, and 800 times of time-saving number are given. In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the game is advanced by hitting to the right, and the special figure 2 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 2 jackpot is won in a second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the big win game is finished, the game is shifted to a first time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) with 160 time-saving times. In the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), when the special figure variation is digested 750 times without making the special figure 2 big hit, the number of times of time-saving 800 times is given. Furthermore, after the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is started, 1500 special figure fluctuations are digested, and when the number of time-savings remains 100 times, 800 times of time-savings are added.

Thus, according to the modification 2, when the transition to the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving), since the number of time-savings is added every time the special figure fluctuation digests 750 times, substantially, the big hit The second time-saving game state is continued until winning. As a result, even if a state in which a big hit cannot be obtained continues for a long time after shifting to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of balls. be possible.

It should be noted that, in the modification 2, when the special figure 1 lottery jackpot is elected, after the jackpot game ends, it may include a case of shifting to a high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability variation). In this case, the probability of transitioning to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation) may be higher than transitioning to another gaming state (first time-saving gaming state or normal state).

[6-8-3. Modification 3]
Next, modification 3 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Since the game board unit of Modification 3 is similar to the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 107, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 3]
In modification 3, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lottery jackpot probabilities are common, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. When a big win is won in special figure 1 or special figure 2 lottery, after the big win game is finished, the state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variable state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

Specifically, in the case of the first hit, that is, when a big win is won in the normal game state, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state (a time-shortening) in which the probability-variable number of times is 10 times and the time-saving number is 746 times. In the case of a big win during time saving, after the big win game is finished, the game machine shifts to a first time saving game state (a time saving) with a probability changing state of 10 times and a time saving number of 10 times. After the jackpot game is over, when the 10 times of special figure fluctuations are digested, it shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, modification 3 is equipped with a b time saving function, and the number of special figure fluctuations (number of times of operation n) required for the second time saving game state (b time saving) to operate When entering a time saving It is set larger than the number of time reductions given. Specifically, the number of operations n is 750 times, and the number of times N of time saving can be set as appropriate, but is set to 100 times, for example. In addition, when a big hit is won in a special figure 2 lottery in a low-probability and time-saving game state, 10000 time-saving times are provided. It should be noted that the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of reduced working hours digested in the first reduced working hours game state (a reduced working hours).

[Modification 3 Game State Transition]
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of Modification 3. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in a normal game state (first hit), after the jackpot game is finished, the game is shifted to a first time-saving game state with a probability variable number of times of 10 times and a time-saving number of times of 746 times. When a special figure 1 jackpot is won in a time-saving game state (a time-saving or b time-saving), after the big win game is finished, the game is shifted to a first time-saving game state with 10 probability variable times and 10 time-saving times.

After the first hit, when the special figure 2 suspension exists at the time when the special figure fluctuation of the number of times of shortening 746 times is digested, when the big hit is won with this special figure 2 suspension, the game is shifted to the big win game state and the big hit is won. After the game state is over, the game state shifts to a probability variable state with a probability variable number of times of 10 and a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of times of 10000 times. If the special figure 2 is reserved and the jackpot is not won, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is entered on condition that the number of variations of the special figure reaches 750 times. After the first hit, when the special figure fluctuation of 746 times of the time saving number of times is digested, if there are 4 special figure 2 reservations, after the 4 special figure 2 reservations are digested without winning the jackpot, the second time saving game state Move to (b time saving). When the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3 or less, after the special figure 2 reservations are consumed without winning the jackpot, the state is once shifted to the normal game state. Then, after the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed 1 to 3 times by hitting to the left, it shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving).
In the modification 3, even if the shift to the non-time-saving gaming state at the time the special figure fluctuation of the number of times of the time saving 746 times is digested, if the special figure 2 hold at that time is four, the production image that encourages the left hand is not displayed on the display device 4007 . When special figure 2 reservation is 3 or less, it displays on the display device 4007 an effect image that encourages hitting to the left. After shifting to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the display device 4007 displays an effect image that prompts the player to hit to the right.

After the big hit during the time saving, at the time when the special figure fluctuation of 10 times of the time saving is digested, if the special figure 2 reservation exists, when the big hit is won with this special figure 2 reservation, it shifts to the big hit game state. , After the jackpot game state is completed, the game state shifts to a probability variable state with a probability variable number of times of 10 and a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of times of 10000 times. If the special figure 2 is reserved and the jackpot is not won, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is entered on condition that the number of variations of the special figure reaches 750 times. It should be noted that after the big hit during the time saving as well as after the first hit, the display device 4007 displays an effect image that prompts left hitting or right hitting according to the number of special figure 2 reservations.

It should be noted that, in the modification 3, when the special figure 1 lottery jackpot is elected, after the jackpot game ends, it may include a case of shifting to a high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability variation). In this case, the probability of transitioning to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation) may be higher than transitioning to another gaming state (first time-saving gaming state or normal state).

In addition, the third modification described above can also be applied to a pachinko game machine called a one-kind-two-kind mixed machine like the third pachinko machine. In the above-mentioned 1 type 2 pachinko game machine, if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, 10,000 times of time-saving times are given, but it is called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine. In a pachinko game machine with a low probability, it is made easy to win a V prize when a small win is won in a special figure 2 lottery in a low-probability short-time game state. Specifically, the special electric accessory 4133 of the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 107 is provided with a V winning opening and a V shutter like the V winning device provided in the third pachinko game machine. . Here, in the type 1 type 2 pachinko game machine, even if a small hit is made during the time saving, the normal electric accessory 4146 catches the game ball on the upstream side, so it is difficult for the game ball to go to the special electric accessory 4133. . Therefore, a long variation may be provided as a variation pattern of the normal symbol, and during the long variation, the normal electric accessory 4146 does not operate, and the game ball may head toward the special electric accessory 4133 downstream of the normal electric accessory 4146. .

[6-8-4. Modification 4]
Next, modification 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described.
FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of Modification 4. FIG. The game board unit of Modification 4 is the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. A second starting port 4140B is provided on the downstream side of the object 4133, and the game ball winning the normal electric accessory 4146 is configured to pass through the second starting port 4140A. A game ball that has passed through the second starting port 4140A and the second starting port 4140B is detected by the second starting port switch 4141 . The game nails are arranged on the board surface around the second starting port 4140B so that one of the game balls that do not win the special electric accessory 4133 wins. Since other configurations of the game board unit of Modification 4 are the same as those of the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Specifications of modification 4]
In the modification 3, there are a probability variable big win and a normal big win as the big wins by special figure 1 and special figure 2 lottery. In the case of the variable probability big hit, after the big winning game is over, the game is shifted to a high probability short-time game state of a high probability state (variable probability state) and a first time-shortening game state (a short time). In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) in which a low-probability state (non-probability variable state) and time saving is not given. The probability of a big hit is, for example, 1/300 at a low probability and 1/150 at a high probability for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 lottery, and the ratio of the big hit to the probability variable big hit is 50%, for example. In addition, the special figure 1 lottery has no small win, and the special figure 2 lottery is designed to win a small win with a high probability. Also, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the probability variable number of times is 750 times, and the time-saving number of times is 700 times.
In addition, modification 3 is equipped with a b time saving function, and the number of special figure fluctuations (number of times of operation n), which is a condition for b time saving to operate, is 750 times. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state (b time saving) is 1000 times. It should be noted that the number of times of operation n shall also include the number of times of reduced working hours digested in the first reduced working hours game state (a reduced working hours).

[Modification 4 Game State Transition]
FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of Modification 4. In the normal game state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed. When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state, if the probability variable jackpot is won, after the jackpot game is finished, the high probability variable number of times 750 times and the first time reduction game state of the time reduction number 700 times. transition to If it is a normal jackpot, it shifts to a normal game state. When a jackpot is won during the probability variable number of times of 750 times, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a high-probability short-time game state or a normal game state based on the jackpot stop symbol.

In the high-probability short-time gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right, and the game ball passes through the passage gate 4126, so that the normal pattern fluctuation is performed in a short time, and most of them are small hits. Become. Here, during execution of the small winning game, the normal electric role product 4146 catches the game ball on the upstream side of the special electric role product 4133. It is a difficult specification to acquire.

After the jackpot game state ends, when 700 times of time saving are consumed, the high probability time saving game state is shifted to the high probability non time saving game state. To obtain a small hit with a high probability by continuing right-handed hitting even after shifting to a high-probability non-time-saving game state and winning a game ball in a second start port 4140B during the remaining 50 times of probability variable times. can be done. At this time, the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) has transitioned to a non-time-saving game state, and since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has been switched to long fluctuation, it is captured by the normal electric accessory 4146 during this long fluctuation. The game ball that has passed through without being caught is directed to the special electric accessory 4133, and the prize to the big prize opening 4131 becomes possible. Therefore, during the remaining 50 probability variable times, it becomes a so-called small hit RUSH in which it is possible to win a small win with a high probability and win a prize ball by a small win game. When the special figure 2 hits during the small win RUSH, it shifts to the big win game state, and after the big win game is finished, it shifts to the high-accuracy short-time game state or the normal game state based on the big win stop pattern. In addition, when the special figure 2 big hit occurs during the small winning RUSH, the big winning game may be executed after the small winning RUSH is finished.

And, when the remaining 50 probability variable times are digested, it shifts to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) with 1000 times of time-saving times. When a big win is achieved in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the big-win game ends, the game is shifted to a high-accuracy time-saving game state or a normal game state based on the big-win stop symbol. When 1000 time saving times are consumed, the second time saving game state (b time saving) shifts to the normal game state.

According to the modified example 4 constituted in this way, even if the state in which the big win cannot be obtained easily continues despite the shift to the high-probability short-time game state after the end of the big win game, the special figure variation is performed up to the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a new amusement that a small hit RUSH and a reduction in working hours can be obtained.

In addition, in the modification 4, when the jackpot is elected in the special figure 1 lottery, after the jackpot game ends, it may include the case of shifting to a high probability non-time-saving game state (latency probability variation). In this case, the ratio of the jackpot to the probability variation jackpot is 50%, and the probability of shifting to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (latent probability variation) is higher than the transition to another gaming state (first time-saving gaming state or normal state) You can make it higher.

[6-8-5. Modification 5]
Next, modification 5 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 5 is the modification 1 to 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine, in which the variation pattern table is switched only when b time saving (reaching the ceiling) is reached, and b time saving is entered from a specific performance. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed in S107 of FIG. ). If the number of operations is n, select the special variation pattern table (S4720), if the number of operations is not n, select the variation pattern table (S4730), determine the variation pattern (S4740).

The special fluctuation pattern determined using the special fluctuation pattern table is a long fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and a special fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control circuit 4200 to the sub-control circuit 4300. , The sub CPU 4301 of the sub control circuit 4300 receives the special variation pattern command, and after starting the special figure variation for the performance, executes the performance of notifying the time saving rush from the specific performance. In modification 5, since the number of times of operation n is 750 times, the long fluctuation pattern is selected every 750 times

According to the modified example 5 configured in this way, a long variation pattern is selected every 750 times, and a specific effect is executed, so that it is possible to impress the player that the b time has been shortened. Become.

Figure 114 is an example of a specific effect executed in the long variation pattern, as shown in Figure 114 (a), during the variation of the second identification pattern 4602 for effect, for effect corresponding to the 750th variation In the special figure 2 reservation information 4612, the variable display of the character information is performed. And, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), special figure 2 reservation information 4612 is displayed in a large size in the 751st variation, and as shown in FIG. 114 (c), before the second identification pattern 4602 for production stops , the variable display of the special figure 2 reservation information 4612 is stopped and displayed as "time saving". As a result, the player is informed of the transition to the time saving. In addition, when the variation is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 114(d), "hit" is displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the variation is a big hit. Also, if the player grasps the number of special figure fluctuations, it becomes possible to predict the entry into the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) at the time when the pending notice appears. In addition, when the c time saving function is installed, if there is a suspension mode in which the stop mode is a special mode, an effect as shown in FIG. 114 may be performed for the suspension. In addition, according to FIG. 114, the variable display of the character information is performed in the special figure 2 reservation information 4612 for production, but not limited to that, in the other display area in the display device 4007 instead of the special figure 2 reservation information 4612 It is possible to display the variation of the character information, and stop displaying "time saving" at the time of the 750th special figure variation. At this time, if the characters are varied in the special figure 2 reservation information 4612, it is possible to display the character variations from the 746th special figure variation before the 4 variation, but if the character variation is displayed alone Furthermore, it is possible to display the variation of the character information at an earlier timing, for example, at the start of the 740th variation.

It should be noted that the specific effect shown in FIG. 114 may be executed only when the special figure fluctuation frequency reaches the operation frequency n. In this case, it is possible to notify the player that the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is near when the specific effect appears. Also, if there is a hold before the hold of the number of times n of operation is read ahead and there is a hold that will result in a big hit, the specific effect shown in FIG. 114 may not be performed. As a result, it is possible for the player to have a regrettable feeling that the game in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) cannot be played due to a big hit before entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). It becomes possible to reduce it, and it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when there are a plurality of suspensions of special figure variation and there are several suspensions before the suspension corresponding to the 750th variation, as shown in FIG. 115, a countdown display may be performed. Specifically, suppose there are 4 holds and the 4th hold based on the last start win is the 751st variation. And, in the next special figure fluctuation, "3" as shown in FIG. 115 (a), and in the next special figure fluctuation, "2" as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 115 (c), "1" is displayed, and at the start of the 751st special figure fluctuation, "Ceiling mode start right hit!" do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115(d), the countdown display can be executed even if there is no hold corresponding to the 751st change among the hold balls. For example, when there is a pending ball to execute an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, after performing a countdown display, as shown in FIG. You may perform the production|presentation which alert|reports the reliability of. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115(f), "123 more times to the ceiling mode!" Since these notifications are performed by the same system of presentation, the player can have both the expectation of a reduction in working hours and the expectation of a big win at the same time, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

[6-8-6. Modification 6]
Next, modification 6 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 6 is modification 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine, in which the total opening time of the small winning game is about 1.8 seconds or less, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening is performed twice. A 2-round jackpot with an opening action of about 1.8 seconds or less is added, and a function of resetting the number of times n of operations is provided when the 2-round jackpot is won. It should be noted that the opening of the big winning opening may be the same operation for the small win and the big win. In the modification 4, it is desirable that the game board unit wins the same big winning opening in the small winning game state and the big winning game state. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between a small winning game and a big winning game.

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect display when winning a small win or a 2-round big win. When a small win or a 2-round big win is won, as shown in FIG. 116(a), the character information "123 times to the ceiling mode" and the character information "750 times to the ceiling mode" are pressed left and right. , and when a small hit is won, as shown in FIG. 116(b), a display of "123 times until the ceiling mode" is displayed to notify the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the b time saving rush at the present time. When a 2-round big hit is won, as shown in FIG. 116(c), a display is made to notify the reset remaining number of special figure fluctuations, "750 times until the ceiling mode". This effect display appears when the 2nd round jackpot is won and when it is decided to execute the effect of notifying the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until b time saving rush. It should be noted that the effect of notifying the number of remaining special figure fluctuations may be an effect suggesting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations.

According to the modified example 6 configured in this way, whether or not the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the b time saving rush is reset is provided with a new game property that improves the interest of the player. becomes possible.

[6-8-7. Other Modifications]
As described above, the modifications 1 to 6 of the fifth pachinko game machine have been described, but the modifications of the fifth pachinko game machine are not limited to those described above. For example, in modifications 1 to 6, the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) and the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) are installed, but from the base value in the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) Also, the base value in the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) may be higher, or the base value in the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) may exceed 100. For example, a plurality of special figure 2 variation pattern tables are provided during b time saving, each special figure 2 variation pattern table has a different variation time, and special figure 2 has a high probability of winning a small hit. As a result, when a long variation pattern table is selected, the number of small winnings per unit time is small, so the number of winning balls per unit time is reduced, and the base value is a low value not exceeding 100, but short. Since the number of small winnings per unit time increases when the variation pattern table is selected, the number of winning balls per unit time increases and the base value becomes a high value exceeding 100. In the modified example of the pachinko game machine, the value of the number of times of operation n, which is the condition for rushing into b time saving, is fixed, but the value of the number of times of operation n may be plural. For example, when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game ends, the number of times n of operations may be determined by a random number lottery from among a plurality of candidate times. At this time, when the number of times of operation n is satisfied during a time saving, b time saving may not be operated. Further, for example, as in Modification 4, the number of times of time saving may be increased for the big hit after reaching the ceiling than the big hit before reaching the ceiling (b time saving arrival). As a result, the expected value of the total number of balls that can be acquired after reaching the ceiling can be increased.

According to the fifth pachinko game machine and its modification described above, by installing the b time reduction that can be said to be a ceiling time reduction, it is possible to make a difference between the ball distribution after reaching the ceiling and the ball distribution before reaching the ceiling. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

[7. Sixth pachinko machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixing machine similar to the third pachinko gaming machine, and as described in detail in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot game There are a first route and a second route as routes until the state is controlled. A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.
Since the configuration and electrical configuration of the game board unit relating to the sixth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following description of the sixth pachinko game machine, the same symbols used in the description of the third pachinko game machine will be used.

The sixth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in basic specifications, particularly in that it has a plurality of limiter counts.
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The process shown in FIG. 117 is the process shown in FIG. 29 with the limiter count management process of S204 added. In the limiter count management process, the main CPU 2201 sets the limiter count based on the number of special figure fluctuations up to the jackpot when the jackpot is from a low probability state (non-variable probability state). Also, when the jackpot is from the variable probability state, the number of loops of the jackpot is counted. Then, when the number of loops of the big win reaches the limiter number of times, the state is shifted to a low probability state.

[7-1. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described.

[7-1-1. Limiter times]
A limiter count is set in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and "3" or "7" can be set as the limiter count in this pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, a limit of 3 times is set when a jackpot is won in the range of special jackpot random numbers 1 to 100, and a limit of 7 times is set when a jackpot is won in the range of special jackpot random numbers 51 to 100. , 3 times limit is set when a big hit is obtained with a random number after the special big hit random number 101.例文帳に追加In addition, the special random number range in which the limit 3 times is set and the special random number range in which the limit 7 times is set can be set as appropriate. Also, the number of limiter times can be set as appropriate.
In addition, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may have different selection ratios of a plurality of limit times. Further, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, although the limit number of times is set according to the special figure random number range, the limit number of times may be set according to a specific special figure fluctuation frequency section.

According to the sixth pachinko game machine, for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations becomes the first big hit at the 200th time, and the limit is set to 3 times, the first time-saving game state (a When the jackpot that shifts to time saving) is won four times in succession, the limiter number of times is reached, and the jackpot (4th jackpot) at the time of reaching the limiter number of times does not shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the jackpot game ends. controlled by It should be noted that "4 times in a row" means that the jackpot game state and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) are alternately repeated, and the jackpot that shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) continues. It is to be executed four times. In addition, in the case of the jackpot game at the time of reaching the limiter count, it is controlled so as not to shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the end of the jackpot game state. This is due to the number of counts of the counter that manages the That is, if the jackpot that moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the end of the jackpot game state is won unless the limiter number of times is reached (the random number extracted by the special symbol lottery becomes the big hit judgment and the first time-saving The number of counts of the counter that manages whether or not the number of times of the limiter is reached is updated in the case of a random number that selects a special symbol to be in the gaming state (a time saving). Then, as a result of determining that the limiter number of times has been reached, control is performed so as not to shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, after the jackpot game state is completed, the number of times of time saving shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) of 1 time or 100 times. When a jackpot that does not shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends is won before the jackpot that shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the end is won four times in a row) is reset (updated to 0, an initial value, etc.) for managing whether or not the limiter count is reached at that time.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the number of limiters is the number of repetitions of the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, the high probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, etc.) (hereinafter , "Loop number") is defined by the upper limit number of times, but it is also possible to define by the number of big hits obtained continuously by repeating the big hit game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed. .

[7-1-2. Big hit, small hit probability]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 2201 detects that a game ball has entered the first start hole 2120, it performs a special figure 1 lottery, and judges a big hit with respect to the extracted random number for judging a big win.

Further, when the main CPU 2201 detects that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs a special figure 2 lottery, and judges a big hit with respect to the extracted random number for judging a big hit.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the probability of determining a big win in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/319, and the probability of determining a small win is zero. In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of judging a big hit is about 1/319, and the probability of judging a small hit is 1/3.75. In other words, the special figure 2 lottery has a lower probability of losing than the special figure 1 lottery because of the possibility of a small hit.

[7-1-3. Number of prize balls]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the number of prize balls entering the opening/closing prize opening 2151 is "10", the number of prize balls entering the big prize opening 2131 is "10", and the prize is awarded by winning the first start opening 2120. The number of balls is "4", the number of prize balls by winning the second start hole 2140 is "4", and the number of prize balls by winning the general prize hole 2122 is "4".

[7-1-4. Big hit, count number of small hit game state]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the big win game state is nine, and the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the small win game state is ten.

[7-1-5. Jackpot distribution]
In the case of jackpot winning by the special figure 1 lottery and jackpot winning by the special figure 2 lottery, either ``10 times'' or ``6 times'' is selected as the number of rounds according to the jackpot mode of the special pattern. The probability of the number of rounds being "10" is 0.5%, and the probability of being "6" is 99.5%. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning hole 2155 in the small winning game state and shifts to the big winning game state, the number of rounds is either "10 times" or "6 times" according to the small winning mode of the second special symbol. is selected. The probability of the number of rounds being "10" is 0.5%, and the probability of being "6" is 99.5%. Note that the special figure 2 big hit is a big hit that does not go through a small hit.

[7-1-6. Time saving frequency distribution]
In the case of a special figure 1 big hit and a special figure 2 big hit, after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is shifted to the first time saving game state (a time saving game state). At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the number of times of time saving according to the jackpot mode of the special symbol. The probability that the number of times of time saving is "100 times" in the special figure 1 jackpot is 50%, and the probability that the number of times of time saving is "1 time" is 50%. More specifically, there are 6R jackpots and 10R jackpots as the special figure 1 jackpots, 50% of the 6R jackpots are given once in a short time, 49.5% are 49.5% of the 6R jackpots and 100 times in a short time, and 10R jackpots. The jackpot that is given 100 times in a short time is 0.5%.

The probability that the number of time reductions in the special figure 2 jackpot will be "100 times" is 100%. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning opening 2155 in the small winning game state and shifts to the big winning game state, it shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) after the big winning game state ends, and the number of time saving times "100 times". is given. In addition, when the ball is not entered into the V winning opening 2155 in the small winning game state, the game state after the small winning game state ends is maintained as the game state before the small winning game state ends. That is, if the game state before the end of the small hit game state is the normal game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is the normal game state, and the game state before the end of the small hit game state is the first time-saving game state ( If it is a time saving), the game state after the end of the small winning game state is the first time saving game state (a time saving). In this case, the number of times of time saving will also take over the number of times of time saving before the end of the small winning game state. It should be noted that, in the following description, entering the V winning hole 2155 may simply be referred to as V winning.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when winning the special figure 2 lottery and shifting to the big win game state (including the big win via the small win and V winning), after the big win game state ends It will be in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 times of time-saving given, but it is not limited to this, and after winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery and finishing the big-hit game state via the V prize. Then, if the big hit game state is entered without going through the small winning of the special figure 2 lottery and the V winning, the time saving 1 time may be given after the big win game state is finished. Also, 10% of the 6R big hit in at least one of the special figure 2 lottery and the special figure 1 lottery may be a big hit that does not shift to the first time saving game state (a time saving). In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, 0.5% is the 10R jackpot, so the remaining 89.5% of the special figures 1 and 2 are the 6R jackpots that shift to time saving. Also, in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, it may be controlled to shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 times of time-saving. , It may be controlled to win a jackpot that does not always shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving). In addition, it is also possible to express not to shift to the 1st time saving game state (a time saving) as "the number of times of time saving is 0 time."

In addition, a round game can be played in the big-hit game state, while the small-hit game state basically does not include a round game. In the small winning game state, it is possible to open and close the big winning opening in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate. Here, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, the first time reduction game state (a time reduction)), but basically after the end of the small win game state does not shift to a game state more advantageous than before shifting to the small winning game state.

However, during the small winning game state, a large winning opening (second large winning opening 2131) having a specific area (V winning opening 2155) is opened, and the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 2155) When the condition device is activated and the accessory continuous activation device is activated, after the small winning game state is finished, the game state is shifted to the big winning game state which is an advantageous game state for the player. At this time, the small winning game state may also be counted in the number of rounds.

Further, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, there is no difference in round allocation between the jackpot game state triggered by the special figure 2 lottery and the jackpot game state triggered by the special figure 1, but the special figure 2 lottery is triggered. There may be a case where the allocation of rounds in the jackpot game state with . Alternatively, the big win triggered by the special figure 2 lottery may be larger in the number of times of time saving given after the big win game state is finished than the big win triggered by the special figure 1 lottery. Also, in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), when the special figure 2 lottery or special figure 1 lottery is used as a trigger to shift to the jackpot game state, the number of times of time saving executed after the jackpot game state ends does not reach the limiter. Although 100 times is desirable as long as it is not, even during the first time saving game state (a time saving), for example, a number less than 100 times may be given. Here, when the normal game state is shifted to the jackpot game state with the special figure 2 lottery or the special figure 1 lottery as a trigger, one time reduction is given. You may give the reduction of working hours. Furthermore, it is possible to set the time reduction to 0 times even when the limiter number of times has not been reached.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, it is equipped with a b time saving function, and on the condition that the special figure fluctuation in the low probability state has reached a specified number of times (for example, 750 times), the second time saving game state Move to (b time saving). The second time-saving game state (b time-saving) continues until either the special figure 1 variation 5 times or the special figure 2 variation 1 time is satisfied, and when the condition is met, the normal game state is shifted.

[7-2. Game flow]
FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game using the sixth pachinko gaming machine of the present invention.

In many cases, the game is started from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player hits to the left and advances the game with the aim of winning a prize at the first start port 2120. - 特許庁A special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the first start port 2120 as a trigger, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) once or 100 times. In the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the player hits to the right and advances the game with the aim of passing the game ball through the passage gate 2126. - 特許庁In the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 becomes a high probability state, so that the normal electric accessory 2146 is easily operated.

When the number of times of time saving is ``1 time'', when the variation of the second special symbol stops in a losing mode for the first time, the first time saving game state (a time saving) is terminated and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a low probability state. transition to At this time, if there is a hold of the special figure 2 fluctuation, it shifts to the pullback mode. If there is no suspension of special figure 2 fluctuation, it shifts to normal mode. Here, when there is a hold of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the first fluctuation is the special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting to the first time saving game state (a time saving). The variation time of this first special figure 2 variation is longer than 4 variations of the variation time of special figure 1. When the reserved special figure 2 variation stops in the big winning mode, it shifts to the big winning game state, and when it stops in the small winning mode, it stops in the small winning mode and shifts to the small winning game state, and the small winning game state. In the case of V winning, the game shifts to a jackpot game state (hereinafter, this jackpot game state may be referred to as a V jackpot game state). Then, after the jackpot game state ends, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of time-saving “100 times”. In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the variation of the first special symbol is not counted as the number of times of time saving. For this reason, when the special figure 1 lottery is won and the first hit is given, and the time saving "1 time" is given after the end of the jackpot game state, there is a suspension of the special figure 1 variation, and due to the suspension, the special figure 1 variation Even if the stop is performed, the first time saving game state (a time saving) does not end.

In addition, according to the above description, if the number of times of time saving is "1 time", when the variation of the second special symbol stops in a losing mode, the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends and the normal symbol lottery Although it was explained that the winning probability shifts to a low probability state, it is not limited to this, and a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big winning opening 2131 is opened by the small win, and the specific area (V winning a prize mouth 2155) when the ball does not win, there is a case where the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends after the end of the small hit game state. Also, in addition to the fluctuation due to special figure 2, the end condition of the first time saving game state (a time saving) is a predetermined number of fluctuations due to special figure 1 when the number of fluctuations due to special figure 2 is 1 time (for example, 5 times) It is also possible to control to end when executed, or to end after a predetermined number of winning times (for example, once).

When the number of times of time saving is ``100 times'', the first time saving game state (a time saving) is terminated when the 100th second special pattern variation stops in a losing mode, and the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is low. transition to state. At this time, if there is a hold of the special figure 2, it shifts to the pullback mode (described later, the final battle). When there is no reservation of the special figure 2, it shifts to the normal game state. When the variation of the second special pattern stops in the big win mode before the number of times of time saving ``100 times'' is digested, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win game state, and wins V in the small win game state. In the case, it shifts to the V jackpot game state. Then, after the end of the V jackpot game state, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of time-saving “100 times”.

The withdrawal mode shifts when there is a hold of the special figure 2 after the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends. Here, the pull-back mode is executed in the normal game state (the game state in which the odds of winning both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are both low). In the pullback mode, when the variation of the second special symbol stops in the big win mode, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win game state, and when V wins in the small win game state, shifts to the V big win game state. do. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of time-saving “100 times”.

In addition, when the number of big hits reaches the limiter number of times in succession, the state is shifted to the normal game state. When the normal game state is entered, the number of limiters is reset. If there is a hold of the special figure 2 fluctuation when shifting to the normal game state, the pullback mode is started. If there is no suspension of the special figure 2 fluctuation, it returns to the normal game state.

Therefore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when 100 times of time saving is obtained at the first hit, or even if it is one time saving number of times, the V big hit game state is triggered by the reserved special figure 2 fluctuation. , and when 100 times of time saving are obtained, the possibility of obtaining a big hit corresponding to the number of times of the limiter increases. Furthermore, even if the jackpot for the number of times of the limiter is obtained, if there is a hold of the special figure 2, the mode is shifted to the withdrawal mode. When the pullback mode is entered, the limiter count is reset to 3 or 7 times. Then, if a special figure 2 big win, a small win, or a V win results in a big win in the pull-back mode, the possibility of obtaining the number of times of shortening time of 100 times and further getting the big win for the number of times of the limiter increases.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, after winning the jackpot for the number of times of the limiter after the jackpot, it shifts to the pullback mode with the special figure 2 pending in the normal game state, and the special figure 2 in the pullback mode. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a high interest that a player can win a V big win and a big win corresponding to the number of limiters in addition to the V big win by winning a V prize through a small win.

In addition, even if the jackpot game state cannot be pulled back in the pullback mode, if the special random number value is a jackpot in the range of 51 to 100, prize balls for eight jackpot games can be expected. It is possible to maintain the desire of the player to play.

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special figure fluctuation is performed 750 times in the normal game state, it shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving). When the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is activated, an instruction image prompting right-handed hitting is displayed on the display device 2007, and the player hits right-handedly to obtain special figure 2 reservation. Here, if there is a special figure 1 suspension at the time of the 750th special figure variation, when the special figure 1 variation due to this special figure 1 suspension starts, the second time saving game state (b time saving) is activated , When the variation is a big hit, the state shifts to a big win game state. If the special figure 2 variation is acquired while the variation is being performed, then the special figure 2 variation is started. At this point, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) ends, and shifts to the withdrawal mode. In the pullback mode, when the variation of the second special symbol stops in the big win mode, or stops in the small win mode and shifts to the small win game state, and when V wins in the small win game state, shifts to the V big win game state. do. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of time-saving “100 times”. When the special figure 2 reservation is lost, it shifts to the normal game state.

Thus, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a V jackpot when the special figure variation is performed 750 times in the normal game state. As a result, even in a so-called hooked state in which it is difficult to obtain a big hit in a normal game state, an opportunity to obtain a V big hit can be obtained by increasing the number of special figure variations, and when a V big hit is obtained. can provide a game machine capable of giving a high interest that four big wins can be obtained until reaching the number of limiter times.
It should be noted that when the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 750 times, the limiter number of times is 3 times, and after 751 times, it may be possible to set the limiter number of times to 7 times. As a result, it becomes possible to rescue a player who has fallen into a state of addiction.

In addition, in the case where the number of limiters is given 3 times and the case where the number of limiters is given 7 times, the effect displayed on the display device 2007 is changed, for example, by changing the character displayed in the ready-to-win effect. A part may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 119(a), after winning the jackpot and finishing the first jackpot game, "3 more times" is once displayed on the display device 2007 (FIG. 119(b)), and the limiter count is 7. In the case of times, a promotion effect may be performed to switch the display to "7 more times" (FIGS. 119(c) and (d)). Alternatively, after the fourth jackpot game is completed, the display device 2007 temporarily displays "Still! 3 more times", and if the limiter count is 7 times, the display is switched to "7 more times". good.

Also, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the number of limiters is determined by the special figure random number range, but the number of limiters may be changed according to the jackpot stop mode of the special figure variation in the low probability state.

Also, in the first time-saving game state of 100 times of time-saving after the end of the big-hit game state or during the big-hit game state, an effect suggesting the number of limiters may be performed.
FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen after the end of the jackpot game state due to the first hit. Display 2007 displays a group of discs 2620 suggesting limiter counts. FIG. 120(a) is an example of an effect screen when the limiter count is "3", and three discs 2620 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the fighter 2630 is displayed on the display device 2007 in the special figure variation that becomes a big hit, and when the disc 2620 is attacked, the state shifts to the big win game state. After the end, as shown in FIG. 120(c), one is defeated and two discs 2620 are displayed. After that, the number of discs 2620 decreases each time the state is shifted to the jackpot game state, and as shown in FIG. do.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen after the end of the jackpot game state due to the first hit. FIG. 121(a) is an example of an effect screen when the number of times of limiter is "7", and two discs 2620 and one disc 2621 whose design is partially different from the disc 2620 are displayed. . A disk 2621 is a character that will be shot down if attacked by a fighter 2630 twice. FIG. 121(a) suggests that four big wins are promised. Then, as shown in FIG. 121(b), when the disc 2620 is attacked, the state shifts to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the disc 2621 changes to the disc 2620 as shown in FIG. Transforming, two discs 2620 are displayed. Also, in the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 121(d), the disk 2621 or the disk 2620 may be reinforced. FIG. 121(d) suggests that six big wins are promised.

In this way, when the limiter count is "7", by displaying the disc 2621 or reinforcing the disc 2621 or the disc 2620, when the fighter 2630 makes a total of seven attacks, all disk 2621 or disk 2620 is shot down.

It should be noted that even when the limiter count is "3", for example, one disk 2620 is displayed first, then the disk 2621 is displayed, or the disk 2621 or the disk 2620 is reinforced. A performance display may be made such that all the discs 2621 or 2620 are shot down when one attack is performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 121(e), the disk 2620 is put into an invincible state where it cannot be shot down, and as shown in FIG. Performance is also possible. Furthermore, by adding a production such that the fighter plane 2630 shoots down a plurality of discs 2620 with one attack, more diverse productions are possible. However, it is also possible to produce an effect that the limiter count was actually "3".

It should be noted that, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine described above, if the end condition of the first time-saving gaming state digests 1 or 100 fluctuations of the special figure 1, the end condition of the second time-saving gaming state is a special figure Although it is set when one fluctuation number of times of 2 is exhausted, the winning or execution number of small hits may be set as the end condition of the time-saving game state. In this case, the time saving game state ends according to the number of winning or the number of executions of the small hit. Furthermore, the time-saving game state may be ended when a special small winning symbol is won or when a special small winning symbol is displayed.

[7-3. Modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, Modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine described above is a pachinko game machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine equipped with a limiter function and a b time saving function. Like the 1st and 2nd pachinko machines, this machine is equipped with a limiter function and b time-saving function in a so-called type 1 pachinko machine. The game board unit of Modified Example 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine is the same as the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[7-3-1. Limiter times]
The limiter count of Modification 1 is the same as that of the sixth pachinko game machine described above, and "3" or "7" can be set as the limiter count. Specifically, when a big hit is won with a random number for determining a special big hit in the range of 1 to 50, a limit of 3 times is set, and a big hit is obtained with a random number for determining a special big hit in the range of 51 to 100. , the limit of 7 times is set, and the limit of 3 times is set when the special figure big hit determination random number is 101 or later and the big hit is obtained.

[7-3-2. jackpot probability]
In Modification 1, the probability of a big hit determination in the first and second special symbol lotteries is about 1/319 at a low probability and about 1/94 at a high probability. In addition, you may include the case where it becomes a small hit determination by the 1st and 2nd special design lottery.

[7-3-3. Number of prize balls]
In Modification 1, the number of prize balls for winning the big prize opening is "10", the number of prize balls for winning the first and second start openings is "4", and the number of prize balls for winning the general prize opening is "4". ”.

[7-3-4. Jackpot Count]
In Modification 1, the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the jackpot game state is nine. In addition, when the small hit is included, for example, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in the small hit game state is set to 10 pieces.

[7-3-5. Jackpot distribution]
In the case of jackpot winning by the special figure 1 lottery and jackpot winning by the special figure 2 lottery, either ``10 times'' or ``6 times'' is selected as the number of rounds according to the jackpot mode of the special pattern.

[7-3-6. variable distribution]
In the normal game state (low-probability non-short-time state), in the case of a jackpot winning by special drawing 1 or a jackpot winning by special drawing 2, a 10% rate shifts to a high probability state (probability variable state), and a 90% rate. to transition to a low-probability state (non-variable state). In the variable probability state or the time-saving game state, in the case of winning a big hit by a special figure 1 lottery or a big win by a special figure 2 lottery, it shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) at a rate of 100%.

[7-3-7. Time saving frequency distribution]
When the special figure 1 jackpot or special figure 2 jackpot is obtained from the normal game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, the state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variable state), the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is substantially transferred. When the number of time-saving times (for example, 10000 times) until the next big hit is set and the state does not shift to a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the big-hit game state, the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 times of time-saving times. transition to If you win a special figure 1 jackpot or a special figure 2 jackpot in a variable state or a time saving game state (first time saving game state (a time saving) or second time saving game state (b time saving)), substantially until the next big hit (for example, 10000 times) is set, and when the limiter number of times is reached and the state shifts to a low probability state (non-variable probability state) after the jackpot game state ends, 100 times of time saving times are set.
Also, in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving state), if the specified number of operations n (for example, 750 times) is digested without winning the special drawing lottery, for example, the second time-saving number of times 100 It shifts to the time saving game state (b time saving).

[7-3-8. Game flow]
Next, the flow of a game using Modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 122, in many cases, in the first modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game starts from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player hits to the left and advances the game with the aim of winning a prize at the first start port 1120.例文帳に追加A special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the first start port 1120 as a trigger, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, the game state shifts to the first time reduction game state (a time reduction) until the next big win. When it does not shift to the probability variable state, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 time-saving times. In the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the player hits to the right and advances the game with the aim of passing the game ball through the passage gate 1126 . In the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is high, so that the normal electric accessory 1146 is easily operated.

If you shift to a variable probability state with the first hit as an opportunity, you can get a big hit for the number of limiters. In addition, even if the player shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 times of time-savings at the time of the first hit, it is possible to obtain a big win for the number of times of the limiter by winning the big win. In addition, the number of limiters is reduced by 1 even when the jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 times of time-saving.

When the number of times of the limiter is reached, after the end of the jackpot game state, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 times of time-saving. If a big hit can be obtained in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 times of this time-saving, the number of limiters is reset, so after the big-hitting game by the big hit is finished, a new big-hitting game for the number of times of the limiter is played. can be obtained. When the jackpot is not obtained in 100 times of time saving, the state is shifted to the normal game state after 100 times of time saving. As described above, in the sixth modified example 1 of the pachinko game machine, whether or not a big hit can be obtained in 100 times of time reduction after reaching the limiter number of times is a big key.

In addition, in the time reduction of 100 times after reaching the limiter number of times, the limit is set to 3 times when the jackpot is obtained between 1 to 50 times of special figure fluctuations, and the limit is set when the jackpot is obtained between 51 to 100 times. A specification in which 7 times is set may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning a big hit by the number of times of time saving being in the second half.

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special figure variation is performed 750 times in the normal game state, the number of times of time saving shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving) of 100 times. When the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) is activated, an instruction image prompting right-handed hitting is displayed on the display device 1007, and the player hits right-handedly to obtain special figure 2 reservation. As a result, in the same way as in the case of the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the number of times of time-saving is 100 times, when a big hit can be obtained in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the big hit game ends due to the big hit Also, a new jackpot game corresponding to the number of times of the limiter can be acquired. When the jackpot is not obtained in 100 times of time saving, the state is shifted to the normal game state after 100 times of time saving.

Thus, even in the sixth modification 1 of the pachinko game machine, by obtaining a big hit in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of 100 times of time-saving after reaching the limiter number of times, more prize balls are obtained. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be expected and can give a high interest. Moreover, even if the state in which the big hit cannot be obtained continues for a long time, if the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches 750 times, the number of times of time saving shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving) with 100 times, and if the second time saving If a big win is achieved in the game state (b time saving), at least prize balls for four big win games can be expected.

Incidentally, in the same way as the sixth pachinko game machine, also in the modification 1, when the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 750 times, the limiter number of times is 3 times, and after 751 times, it may be possible to set the limiter number of times to 7 times. . In addition, in the case where the limiter count is given three times and the case where the limiter count is given seven times, the effect displayed on the display device 1007 is changed, for example, by changing the character displayed in the reach effect. A part may be changed. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, "3 more times" may be temporarily displayed on the display device 1007, and if the number of times of the limiter is 7 times, the display may be changed to "7 more times". Alternatively, after the fourth jackpot game is completed, the display device 1007 temporarily displays "Still more! 3 more times", and if the limiter count is 7 times, the display is switched to "7 more times". good.

Also, in the same way as the sixth pachinko game machine, in the modified example 1, the number of limiters is determined by the random number for judging the big hit, but the number of limiters is changed according to the special figure fluctuation jackpot stop mode in the low probability state. may

[7-4. Modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 2 has a limiter function, and partially changes the configuration of the game board unit of Modification 1, and also partially changes the specifications relating to the big wins and small wins.

[7-4-1. Configuration of game board unit]
FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board unit according to Modification 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit according to Modification 2 is a game board unit 1010 according to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. is a change in the arrangement of In addition, in the modification 2 shown in FIG. 123, the same members or members having the same functions as the members in the game board unit 1010 related to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. detailed description is omitted.

The small winning unit 1150 is arranged above the left area 1106 as shown in FIG. The small winning unit 1150 has the same configuration as the small winning unit 150 provided in the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Also, the passage gate unit 1125B in the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. It is configured to always pass through the pass gate 1126B before. It should be noted that, in modification 2, a pass gate unit 1125 is provided in the right area 1107 in the same manner as the game board unit 1010 shown in FIG. In Modified Example 2, the pass gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107 is called a pass gate unit 1125A, and the pass gate 1126 is called a pass gate 1126A. Also, a normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged below the first starting port 1120 . The normal electric accessory 1146 can catch the game ball even if it hits to the left or hits to the right.

Therefore, when a small win is won in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lotteries, it is possible to win a small win big prize opening 1151 by hitting to the left. Also, when a big win is won in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 lotteries, the big winning opening 1131 for big win is made to win.

It should be noted that if the special figure 1 lottery is won with a big hit or a small hit, the small winning big prize opening 1151 is won, and if the special figure 2 lottery is a big hit or a small win, the big prize winning opening 1131 is made to win. good. As a result, the big winning game or the small winning game by the special figure 1 lottery can be advanced by hitting to the left, and the big winning game or the small winning game by the special figure 2 lottery can be advanced by hitting to the right. In the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) and second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving)), the passage gate 1126A is easier to pass the game ball, so it is advantageous to proceed by hitting to the right. be. In addition, it is also possible to hit right in the normal game state, pass the game ball through the passage gate 1126A, and aim to win the second start port 1140 by winning the normal pattern. However, in the modification 2, the special figure 2 variation is not reserved, and the special figure 1 variation can be reserved up to 4 times, so more people aim to win the first start port 1120 by hitting left. It is a specification that can change the special figure.

[7-4-2. Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2 Reserved]
In the modification 2, the special figure 2 is preferentially changed over the special figure 1. Also, as described above, the special figure 2 variation is not reserved, and the special figure 1 variation can be reserved up to 4 times. In the normal game state, the variation pattern determination table is set so that the variation pattern of special figure 1 is about 10 seconds. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is extremely short, and the opening of the normal electric accessory 1146 is slightly longer, for example, it is set to about 2 seconds. Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuates, it always passes through the passage gate 1126B, so as soon as the normal pattern lottery is won, the general electricity opens, but at this time the special figure 1 has already fluctuated. Even if the special figure 1 wins the ordinary electric accessory 1146 opened during the variation, the special figure 2 variation is not reserved, so the special figure 2 variation cannot be performed. Thus, in the normal game state, even if the normal electric accessory 1146 is won, the special figure 2 does not change, so the second starting port 1140 becomes a base winning port like the general winning port.

[7-4-3. small hit]
A small hit is included in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. In particular, the special figure 2 lottery is a setting that makes it easy to win a small hit. The variation pattern determination table of special figure 1 is selected for a pattern with a short variation time triggered by a small hit. Specifically, since the variation pattern of special figure 1 is about 10 seconds, prepare a variation pattern determination table in which the 1/10 variation pattern is selected, and switch to the 1/10 variation pattern determination table with a small hit. . Then, after the special figure 1 fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern determination table is restored.

As a result, for example, when the 1/10 variation pattern is selected, the special figure 1 variation is completed by the time the normal pattern lottery is won and the ordinary electric accessory 1146 is won, and the special figure 2 is It may change. Since the special figure 2 lottery is easy to win a small hit, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) can be acquired by opening the big winning opening 1151 for the small win and winning the game balls.

By replacing the 1/10 variation pattern determination table with the 1/8 and 1/6 variation pattern determination tables, the states of the base values 50, 70 and 90 can be created. Alternatively, a table may be prepared from which time fluctuation patterns of 1/10, 1/8, and 1/6 are selected, and any one of them may be determined by random number lottery.

[7-4-4. jackpot]
In Modification 2, a 2-round jackpot with a relatively short round game time is installed. In the case of a 2-round jackpot, as in the modified example 1, there is a 10% probability that the high probability state (probability variable state) and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) until the next big hit will be shifted to, and a 90% probability will be low. Probability state (non-probability variable state) and the number of times of time saving shifts to the first time saving game state (a time saving) of 100 times.

[7-4-5. Production screen]
In the modification 2, since it shifts to the second time saving game state (b time saving) on the condition that the special symbol is changed 750 times in the normal game state, the b time saving is activated at the start of the 751st special symbol variation. The stop mode of the identification pattern for production in this 751st special figure variation, the 2 rounds jackpot from the normal game state, and the low probability state (non-probable variable state) and 100 times of the 1st time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends. The stop mode of the identification symbol for production in the special symbol variation that becomes a normal jackpot in 2 rounds, which shifts to (a time saving), is the stop mode by the common special symbol.

Figure 124 is an example of the effect executed in the special figure variation at the time of entering the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) or the special figure variation that becomes a two-round normal jackpot, and the first identification for presentation on the display device 1007 A pattern 1601 and the first special figure reservation information 1611 for production are displayed. When the first identification pattern 1601 for production related to the special figure fluctuation at the time of entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) or the special figure fluctuation that becomes a 2nd round normal jackpot starts to change, it is shown in FIG. 124 (a) Thus, the first identification pattern 1601 for production becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win production is started. Then, at the end of the ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. All the first identification patterns 1601 of 1601 are changed again, and as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the first identification pattern 1601 for production in the mode of time saving is displayed other than the special figure fluctuation at the time of entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) and the special figure fluctuation that becomes a 2nd round normal jackpot. no.

According to the modified example 2 configured in this way, in the special figure fluctuation at the time of entering the second time saving game state (b time saving) and the special figure fluctuation that becomes a 2 round normal jackpot, stop by a common special symbol as a production display Since it becomes a mode, it becomes possible to make it difficult to judge whether it entered into the 1st time saving game state (a time saving) or the 2nd time saving game state (b time saving).

In addition, in the above-described modification 2, the c time saving function is not installed, but the c time saving function may be installed, in this case, when the special figure stop mode is a condition for c time saving operation , The stop mode of the first identification pattern 1601 for production may be stopped with a special pattern of "time saving-time saving-time saving".

[7-5. Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 3, like the sixth pachinko game machine, can set a plurality of types of limiter counts, and partially changes the configuration of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. It is a part of the specifications for the big hit and the small hit.

[7-5-1. Configuration of game board unit]
FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board unit according to Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit according to Modification 3 is the game board unit 10 related to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. A second starting port 140B is arranged. In addition, the second starting port 140 related to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 will be referred to as a second starting port 140A. In the third modification shown in FIG. 125, the same members or members having the same functions as the members in the game board unit 10 related to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. detailed description is omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration and operation of the rotating accessory 185. As shown in FIG. The rotating accessory 185 includes a disc 185a, a notch 185b, a rotating shaft 185c, and a rotating motor (not shown) that transmits rotation to the rotating shaft 185c to rotate the disc 185a at a constant speed. there is The disk 185a has a thickness slightly larger than that of the game ball, and has a radially extending notch 185b formed in the outer peripheral portion thereof. This notch 185b has a size that can accommodate one game ball. The rotating shaft of the disk 185a is erected perpendicularly to the board surface at the center of the disk 185a.

The rotating accessory 185 is arranged in front of the second starting port 140B arranged in the left area 106 . At this time, the second starting port 140B is positioned closer to the top of the rotary accessory 185 in the direction of rotation. Therefore, the second starting port 140B is hidden in the rotating accessory 185, but the rotating accessory 185 rotates and the second starting port 140B through the notch 185b immediately after the notch 185b passes the top part. becomes visible. Further, two game nails are planted in the vicinity of the upper portion of the rotary accessory 185 in the left area 106 at a distance slightly larger than the game ball.

At the timing when the notch 185b passes through the top, when the game ball passes between the two game nails near the upper part of the rotary accessory 185, as shown in FIG. ball is contained. In this state, when the rotary accessory 185 rotates and the notch 185b reaches the second starting port 140B as shown in FIG. 126(b), the game ball in the notch 185b moves to the second starting port 140B. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the inside of the notch 185b becomes empty. By the time the notch 185b returns to the top again, when the game ball enters between the two game nails near the top of the rotary accessory 185, as shown in FIGS. 126(c) and 126(d), The game ball is maintained on the top of the rotating accessory 185, and when the notch 185b reaches the top, the game ball is placed in the notch 185b as shown in FIG. be accommodated. By repeating such an operation, the game ball wins at regular time intervals with respect to the second starting port 140B at the time of hitting to the left.

[7-5-2. Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2 Variation]
In modification 3, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. In the normal game state, in the variation pattern determination table that determines the variation pattern of special figure 2, the variation pattern of about 10 minutes of variation time is determined, and in the variation pattern determination table that determines the variation pattern of special figure 1, at the longest A variation pattern with a variation time of about 2 minutes is determined.

[7-5-3. small hit]
A small hit is included in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. In particular, the special figure 1 lottery is a setting that makes it easy to win a small hit. In addition, when a small win is won in the normal game state, the opening time of the small win big prize opening 151 in the small win game state is relatively short, and even if the small win is won in the left hand shot, there is a possibility that a prize ball can be obtained. has low specifications.

[7-5-4. others]
In Modified Example 3, the number of winning balls to the second starting port 140B is set to "1". Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second starting hole 140B at regular time intervals when hitting left, the number of balls in the player's possession does not increase. The other specifications are generally the same as those of the sixth pachinko game machine, but when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the V attacker does not operate and the V prize cannot be won. In addition, Modification 3, like the sixth pachinko machine, is equipped with a b time saving function, and the special figure fluctuation in the normal state, that is, the low probability non-time saving state is the specified number of operations n (for example, 750 times ) is reached, the b time saving function is activated to shift to the second time saving game state.

[7-5-5. Production screen]
By the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300, based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the total number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state (the sum of the special figure 1 fluctuation number and the special figure 2 fluctuation number ), the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1, and the number of display fluctuations, which is the number of fluctuations of the special symbols displayed on the display device 7, are controlled. The number of display fluctuations is the number obtained by cumulatively adding the number of times of fluctuation to the number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 1, and the number of additions is appropriately determined from the number below the difference between the total number of fluctuations and the number of display fluctuations.

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 7 in Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 127(a) shows an example of an effect screen displayed on the display device 7 at the start of the normal state, that is, the low probability non-time saving state, and the display device 7 has a special figure 1 identification pattern for the effect 601, special figure 1 pending information 611, and variation frequency information 621 for displaying the display variation frequency, various effect images are displayed. In the normal state, because it is possible to win the first starting port 120A and the second starting port 140, special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation in the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 is done. On the other hand, the display device 7 displays a special figure 1 identification symbol 4601 for production corresponding to the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 4163, but is displayed by the second special symbol display unit 4164. The special symbol for production corresponding to the second special symbol to be played and the reserved information are not displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the fluctuation number information 621 is displayed as "0" at the start of the normal state, that is, the low probability non-time saving state, and when the fluctuation stops, as shown in FIG. 127 (b) is displayed as "1". At this time, if the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time, and the result of the special figure 1 lottery is a small hit, the special figure 2 will also stop, so the total number of fluctuations will be "2". If the result of the drawing in FIG.

In the modification 3, when a small hit is achieved through the ready-to-win effect, the number of times displayed in the change number information 621 is added. As for the fluctuation frequency information 621, the fluctuation frequency of the special figure 1 is displayed in the initial state, and the additional frequency is cumulatively added each time a small hit is achieved through the reach effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the change count information 621 is displayed as "200", but the total change count is "300". In this state, reach is applied as shown in FIG. 201”. Here, when shifting to the small hit game state, the range below the difference between the total number of fluctuations "300" and the number "200" displayed as the number of fluctuations information 621, that is, the number of additions in the range of 0 to 100 The sub CPU 301 decides. For example, when 50 times is determined, "+50" is displayed as shown in FIG. 127(e), and the variation number information 621 changes to "251" as shown in FIG. 127(f).

According to the modified example 3 configured in this way, since the game ball wins at a constant time interval with respect to the second start port 140B when hitting to the left, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are performed at the same time. It is possible to increase the opportunity, and if a small hit is won with the special figure 1 variation, the special figure 2 variation is also forcibly stopped, so the special figure variation for the number of operations n minutes until b time saving is activated It can be digested quickly.
In addition, when a small win is achieved through the ready-to-win effect, a predetermined number is added to the number of times of display of the change number information 621, so it is possible to improve the interest in the ready-to-win effect and give an impression that b time saving is approaching. become.

[7-6. Modification 4 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 4 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 4 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured such that, in modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, a small hit RUSH state occurs when the b time saving function is activated. Also, in the fourth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied.

[7-6-1. jackpot probability]
In Modification 4, the probability of a big hit determination in the first and second special symbol lotteries is about 1/319 at a low probability and about 1/94 at a high probability. The probability of small hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is 0, the low probability of small hit determination in the second special symbol lottery is, for example, 1/10, and the high probability is 0.

[7-6-2. Time saving game state]
The winning probability of the normal drawing lottery in the first time saving game state (a time saving) is higher than the winning probability of the normal drawing drawing in the normal game state, but the winning probability of the normal drawing drawing in the second time saving game state (b time saving) , It is the same as the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery in the normal game state.

The opening time of the normal electric accessory at the time of winning the normal pattern in the first time saving game state (a time saving) is longer than the opening time of the normal electric role object at the time of winning the normal game in the normal game state, but the second time saving game state The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory at the time of winning the normal pattern in (b time saving) is the same as the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory at the time of winning the normal pattern in the normal game state.

The normal pattern fluctuation time in the first time reduction game state (a time reduction) and the second time reduction game state (b time reduction) is set shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal game state. In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation time in the second time reduction game state (b time reduction) is set significantly shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time in the first time reduction game state (a time reduction).

According to the modified example 4 configured in this way, when the b time saving of the non-winning easy state (no open extension function) is activated at the ceiling reaching (the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches the number of times of operation n), the normal electric role Since the opening time of the object 146 is not extended, the game ball not captured by the normal electric accessory 146 flows into the small winning large winning opening 151, and is played in the small winning large winning opening 151 in the small winning game state. It becomes possible to win the ball. In addition, since the normal pattern fluctuation is digested at high speed, the time until winning a small win is shortened, so that it is possible to obtain prize balls by frequently shifting to a small winning game state. Thus, when b time saving is activated, so-called small hit RUSH is activated.

[7-7. Modification 5 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 5 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 5 of the sixth pachinko game machine is that in modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, when the b time saving function is activated, the normal pattern winning probability is slightly different compared to the case of the normal game state. Yes, it is equipped with a so-called short-time operation that does not change the operation of ordinary electric accessories. Also, in the fourth modified example of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 according to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 is applicable.

[7-7-1. Specifications of modification 5]
In the specification of Modified Example 5, the probability of determining a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/99 in the low probability state and about 1/66 in the high probability state. The probability of a small hit determination in the first special symbol lottery is 0. The probability of a big hit determination in the second special symbol lottery is 1/99 in a low probability state and about 1/66 in a high probability state. In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of small hit determination is about 97/99 in a low probability state and about 67/69 in a high probability state.
The probability that the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpots in the normal game state are variable probability jackpots is 50%, and the probability that they are normal jackpots is 50%. The probability that the special figure 1 jackpot in the high probability state is a probability variable jackpot is 100%, and the probability that it is a normal jackpot is 0%.
The probability of winning by the normal drawing lottery is, for example, 10/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time saving game state (a time saving).

The number of times of probability variation and the number of times of time reduction in the first time reduction game state (a time reduction) are both 90 times, and when the special figure fluctuation reaches 90 times after the end of the big hit game, If it is a high probability state, it shifts to a low probability state Then, it shifts from the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) to the normal game state.

In modification 5, it is provided with a b time saving function, and the number of times n of operations for entering b time saving is set to a relatively shallow number of times, for example, 90 times. Although the number of times N of time saving can be set as appropriate, it is set to 10 times, for example. The probability of winning by the normal drawing lottery in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is, for example, 11/256 in the normal game state. Here, according to the fifth modified example of the sixth pachinko game machine, in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the normal electric accessory 3146 is activated by the so-called electric chew support in the same way as the fourth pachinko game machine. When the game ball is caught, the first non-electric accessory 3441 is opened, making it easier to win the first starting port 3120 and making it difficult to win the second starting port 3140 . In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), when the normal electric accessory 3146 captures the game ball by the so-called electric chew support, the second non-electric accessory 3441 opens and enters the second start port 3140 It becomes easier to win a prize, and it is difficult to win a prize at the first starting port 3120 .

Also, when a big win is won in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), it is set more advantageous for the player than when a big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal game state. When the normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot is won in the normal game state, the time saving is given 90 times, but when the jackpot is won in the second time saving game state (b time saving), until the next jackpot (time saving 10000 times). time is given.

Next, the flow of a game using the fifth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 128, in many cases, in the fifth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game starts from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player hits to the left and advances the game with the aim of winning a prize at the first start port 3120. - 特許庁A special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the first start port 3120 as a trigger, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the game state shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the probability variable number of times and the time-saving number of times are 90 times. When it does not shift to the probability variable state, the number of times of time saving shifts to a low probability time saving game state (a time saving) of 90 times.

After the end of the big win game state, the state shifts to the big win game state again in which the big win is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the 90th first time-saving game state. At this time, in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of a low-probability state. Also, after the jackpot game state due to the variable probability big hit, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches the specified number of times (limiter count), after reaching the specified number of times (limiter count), the low Shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in the probability state. Note that the number of loops is reset when transitioning to the low probability state.

When the number of times of time saving (90 times) in the first time saving game state (a time saving) is digested, from the next special figure fluctuation, the number of time saving times is 10 times of special figure 2 fluctuation To the second time saving game state (b time saving) Transition. When a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the game moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 10000 time-saving times. In the second time saving game state (b time saving), when the number of times of time saving is consumed 10 times, it shifts to the normal game state which is a low probability non-time saving state.
In addition, the number of operations n for entering b time saving, the number of time saving times N, and the advantage for the player in the case of winning the jackpot in the second time saving game state (b time saving) are not limited to those described above, It can be set as appropriate.

According to the modified example 5 configured in this way, by winning the jackpot during the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), even if the normal jackpot is won, the time-saving is given until the next jackpot (time-saving 10000 times). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving).

In addition, the modification 5 is not limited to the above-mentioned, for example, according to the number of times of the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) acquired before winning the jackpot in the low probability state, benefits given to the player can be increased. For example, applied to the specifications of the modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, the larger the number of times of the second time-saving gaming state (b time-saving) acquired before winning the jackpot in the low probability state, the larger the number of limiters. You may enable it to be selected. In addition, in the above-described modification 5, the number of fluctuations in the high probability state is also included in the number of operations n for activating the second time saving gaming state (b time saving), but including the number of fluctuations in the high probability state Instead, when the special figure fluctuation is performed n (90 times) after moving from the high probability state to the low probability state, it may be shifted to the second time saving game state (b time saving). As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to continue the game, who wants to change the special figure only 90 more times, instead of ending the game immediately after the big win game is over.

Also, in the above-described modification 5, an example in which the game board unit 3010 related to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 is applied, but other game board units may be used. For example, in the game board unit 3010 related to the fourth pachinko game machine, the first operating mechanism 3511 and the second operating mechanism 3512, the first non-electrical accessory 3440 and the first non-electrical accessory 3440 are deleted, and distributed. The game balls distributed by the device 3506 may enter the first starting port 3120 and the second starting port 3140 directly. Furthermore, in the game board unit 1010 related to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. It is also applicable to those who do. However, in this case, if a jackpot is won in the normal game state or the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), a time-saving 90 times is awarded after the jackpot state ends, and a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). If you do, give 10000 times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot state.

Further, according to the modified example 5 described above, when the number of loops reaches the specified number of times (limiter number of times), after the jackpot gaming state that reaches the specified number of times (limiter number of times), it moves to a low probability short working hours gaming state, Not limited to that, it may be shifted to the low-probability short-time gaming state. Also, the number of loops may be the number of loops between the time-saving game state and the jackpot game state.

[7-8. Modified example 6 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 6 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 6 of the sixth pachinko game machine is the modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, in accordance with the stop pattern of the special figure at the time of operation number n, which is the condition for rushing into b time saving, It is to switch the contents of the 2 o'clock short game state (b o'clock short). Also, in the sixth modified example of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied.

[7-8-1. Specifications of modification 6]
The specifications of Modification 6 are substantially the same as the specifications described for the first pachinko game machine. The probability of winning by the normal drawing lottery is, for example, 50/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time saving game state (a time saving).

Furthermore, the content of the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is determined based on the random number value acquired by the random number lottery for determining the stop pattern of the special figure when the number of times of operation is n.

FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in Modification 6 of the sixth pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 129, in many cases, in the sixth modification of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game starts from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player hits to the left and advances the game with the aim of winning a prize at the first start port 120.例文帳に追加A special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the first start port 120 as a trigger, and when the special figure 1 lottery is won, the game state shifts to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the state shifts to a high probability state, and shifts to a first time reduction game state (a time reduction) in which the number of times of time reduction is 0 or 10000 times. In other words, it shifts to a latent state or a variable state with electric chew support. In the case of a normal jackpot, the state shifts to a low probability state and shifts to a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the number of times of time-saving is 50 times.

After the big win game state is finished, the state shifts to the big win game state again in which the big win is won in the special figure lottery in the first time-saving game state. At this time, in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of a low-probability state. Also, after the jackpot game state due to the variable probability big hit, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches the specified number of times (limiter count), after reaching the specified number of times (limiter count), the low Shift to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in the probability state. The loop count is reset when transitioning to a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state reaching the specified number of times (limiter number of times), it may be shifted to the normal game state (low-probability short-time state).

When the number of times of time saving (50 times) in the low probability state and the first time saving game state (a time saving) is digested, it shifts to the normal game state.
When the number of special figure fluctuations in the low probability state reaches 750 times, it shifts from the next special figure fluctuation to the second time saving game state (b time saving). The winning probability of the general figure lottery in the second time saving game state (b time saving) and the fluctuation time are determined by the stop mode due to the 750th special figure fluctuation.

Specifically, when the stop symbol of the special figure is in the losing mode, it is grouped into losing 1 and losing 2 based on the random number value. In the case of loss 1, a slight reduction in working hours 1 (for example, the probability of winning by the general drawing lottery is 51/256) is set. In the case of the deviation 2, a slight reduction in working hours 2 (for example, the probability of winning by the general drawing lottery is 52/256) is set. Also, when the stop pattern of the special figure is in a losing mode, it is grouped into losing 1 and losing 2 based on the random number value. In the case of loss 1, slight time reduction 1 (for example, winning probability by normal drawing lottery is 11/256) is set. In the case of loss 2, a slight reduction in working hours 2 (for example, the probability of winning by the general drawing lottery is 12/256) is set. For example, 20 times is set as the number of times N of time saving.
When the stop pattern of the special figure is a small win mode, it is grouped into a small win 1 and a small win 2 based on the random number value. In the case of 1 small hit, 100 times of working hours are set, and in the case of 2 small hits, 200 times of working hours are set. The probability of winning by the normal drawing lottery is the same as the normal game state, but the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is switched to a short-time fluctuation pattern.
Then, in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), when the special figure fluctuation of the specified number of times is performed, it shifts to the normal game state.

According to the modified example 6 configured in this way, according to the stop pattern of the special figure at the time of the operation number n to enter the second time saving game state (b time saving), the second time saving game state (b The degree of advantage for the player in time saving) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the stop symbol of the special symbol when the number of operations is n.

[7-9. Modification 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine]
Next, modification 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. Modification 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine relates to a pachinko game machine equipped with b time saving function. In modification 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 is applicable. Generally, in the game by the pachinko game machine, the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) is the basic state, but in Modification 7, the latent probability variable state (high-probability non-time-saving state) is the basic state.

For example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special lottery is set relatively high, the percentage of winning the probability variable jackpot in the special lottery is set high (for example, 97%), and in the case of the probability variable jackpot, the first time-saving gaming state (a By lowering the rate of transition to time saving), the rate of going to the latent probability change (potential change non-time saving) state is increased. In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the state is shifted to a low probability state (non-probability variable state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving). When shifting to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), N time-saving times are given.

Further, when entering the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), there is a high probability that the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) continues after the big win game ends. When the normal jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the state shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the big win game ends. When winning a probability variable jackpot in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving game), after the jackpot game is finished, the game is shifted to either M-time ST or a high-probability non-time-saving game state without time saving. When shifting to ST of M times, at the same time, it shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) of time-saving times M+N times. That is, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game is shifted to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the end of the big hit game, and the first M times become a high probability state, and after the end of ST N times of will be in a high probability state. In addition, the number of balls that can be obtained when shifting from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state is significantly larger than the number of balls that can be obtained when the non-time-saving game state transitions to the jackpot game state. It's becoming Thus, according to the modification 7, the time-saving gaming state of the low-probability state (low-probability short-time gaming state) is more advantageous to the player than the probability variable state (high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) without time-saving It is in specification. In addition, the limiter function is installed in the modification 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine. For example, when the number of loops between the big hit and the high-probability non-time-saving game state is 15 times (the limiter number of times is 15), the game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the number of loops between the big hit and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is 5 times. In the case of the number of times (the limiter number of times is 5), the state is shifted to the normal game state. Note that the number of limiter times is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the game flow will be described. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh modification of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Immediately after the hall is opened, it is in a normal game state, but after the start of the game, the probability of winning a jackpot is high and most of them shift to the latent probability variable state, so the basic state is the latent probability variable state (high probability non-short-time state). When the normal jackpot is won and the state shifts to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the counting of the number of operations n, which is the operating condition of the b time-saving function, is started. Here, the number of times n of operation is set to be the same as or larger than the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state (a time saving) of N times. For this reason, if the number of times of operation n is the first time saving game state (a time saving) time saving number of times (N times), when the first time saving game state (a time saving) ends, b time saving from the next special figure fluctuation The function is activated to shift to the second time-saving game state, and as a result, the number of times of time-saving is added. When the game shifts to ST after the end of the jackpot game, the count of the number of times n of operation is not executed in the number of times of time saving of M times which is the high probability state, and then the state shifts to the low probability state and the number of times of time saving of N times is consumed. If so, the counting of the number of activations n is performed. Therefore, when the ST ends, the b time saving function is activated from the next special figure variation, and the game state is shifted to the second time saving game state, and as a result, the number of time saving times is further added. In the case of shifting to a high-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, since the time-saving is not provided, the game is usually advanced aiming at the jackpot.

Thus, according to the modification 7, the time-saving gaming state in the low probability state is more advantageous to the player than the variable state where time-saving is not possible, and the first time-saving gaming state (a time-saving) Since the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is operable after , it is possible to provide the player with a new interest that the time-saving is likely to continue.

In addition to winning the normal jackpot, the game moves to a low-probability state by clearing the RAM, missing the ST, or the like. In this case as well, the count of the number of times of operation n, which is the condition for operating the b time saving function, is started. Therefore, immediately after the hall opens, the b time saving function is activated by digestion of the special figure fluctuation of the number of times n of operation, so that it is possible to install a so-called morning function. Also, when the limiter number of times is reached, the state shifts to the low probability state.

According to the sixth pachinko game machine and its modification described above, a game machine having a new advantageous state is provided by having a plurality of types of limiter counts, and by providing a case where the limiter count is large and a case where the limiter count is small. It becomes possible to In addition, according to the sixth pachinko machine and its modification, it is possible to make a difference between giving balls after reaching the ceiling and giving balls before reaching the ceiling by installing b time reduction, which can be said to be a ceiling time reduction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, the number of time-saving grants may be increased for the big hit after reaching the ceiling than for the big hit before reaching the ceiling (b time-saving reaching). As a result, the expected value of the total number of balls that can be acquired after reaching the ceiling can be increased. It should be noted that the sixth modified examples 1 to 7 of the pachinko game machine may be a game machine that does not have a limiter function.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described ones, and the following functions may be provided particularly in models equipped with b time saving.
When a general look-ahead performance lottery that expects a normal big hit and an indication performance suggesting a reduction in ceiling time are overlapped, the indication performance of a reduction in ceiling time (shorter b time) may be preferentially displayed.
Also, the time after the ceiling time saving (b time saving) may be measured and displayed.
In addition, when the player tries to leave the table when the number of remaining rotations until reaching the ceiling time saving (b time saving) is near, a function may be provided to suggest to the player that the ceiling time saving is approaching. For example, a sensor that detects the player may be provided to suggest when the player touches the firing handle without a certain period of time before transitioning to the demo screen. Specifically, when the number of rotations remaining until reaching the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is close, display "sit down" during the demonstration, display "sit down" during the demonstration and suggest settings, etc. function may be installed.

The configuration of the pachinko game machine described above and the effects of the configuration will be described below.

[Appendix 1]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including a game state and a game state.

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state in which the time for variable display of the above symbols is shortened (time-saving state), a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby giving a predetermined profit to the player. A game machine equipped with a game state that is advantageous to play has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-076136).

By the way, there is a demand for higher amusement even in gaming machines equipped with advantageous game state functions.

The purpose of the game machine described below is to solve such problems and to provide a game machine equipped with a highly interesting and advantageous game state function.

(1) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
Identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by fluctuation and stop of identification information;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a displacement member that can be displaced between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture game media;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the displacement determination means by fluctuation and stoppage of the specific identification information;
a game state control means for controlling a game state;
with
The special game state includes a first game state in which a predetermined game capable of giving a profit to the player can be executed, and a second game state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times,
The game state control means is
When the stop display mode of the identification information displayed when the determination result of the special game state transition determination means determines that the transition to the second game state is not permitted is a special mode, the displacement member in the second state is moved. Shift to a special time-saving state that makes it easier to select a displacement pattern with a longer time to determine that it is displaced to the first state than in the normal state,
After transitioning to the special time saving state, the special time saving state is terminated when the number of times the identification information changes reaches a specified number of times,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the normal state, the variation of the identification information triggered by passage of the game medium into the second start area is stopped, and the first game state is executed.

According to (1), when the stop display mode of the identification information becomes a special mode, it shifts to a special time-saving game, and in the special time-saving game (b time-saving, c time-saving), the displacement determination means (normal symbol lottery) is the second When it is determined to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state, the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) is in the first state (open state), and the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) is in a special time-saving state. Triggered by capturing the game medium (game ball), the identification information starts to change and the special time saving state shifts to the normal state. When winning the transition to the first game state due to a change in the identification information, the game state shifts to the first game state, and when the stop mode at this time is a special mode, after the first game state ends, a special time saving is performed. Move to gaming. Thereby, a loop of the first game state is formed by alternately repeating the special time-saving game and the normal state, and the first game state can be continued. Thus, an advantageous game state triggered by the special time-saving state can be realized, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

(2) In (1), when the stop display mode of the identification information is a special mode, transition to the first game state, and after the end of the first game state, play the game to the second start area for the specified number of times. Transition to the special time saving state in which the identification information is changed a specific number of times triggered by the passage of the ball,
A game machine characterized in that the special time saving state is ended when the identification information starts to fluctuate the specified number of times.

(3) In (1) or (2), if the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area while the identification information is changing, the change of the identification information is suspended. having means to retain
The game state control means, after the end of the first game state triggered by the stop display mode of the identification information display means changing to the special mode, changes due to passage of the game medium into the second start area. A game machine characterized by ending the special time-saving state at the same time when the identification information starts to fluctuate based on the suspension when it is suspended.

(4) In (3), after the first game state is terminated when the stop display mode of the identification information display means has changed to the special mode, the game medium is held in the holding means for the second start-up. A gaming machine characterized in that the special time-saving state is ended when the change in the identification information due to passing through the area is not suspended.

(5) In (1) to (4), the game state control means switches the displacement member to the first state with a predetermined probability by the displacement determination means in the game state after the end of the second game state. and a time-saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member in the second state is switched to the first state in a long displacement time. and
The gaming machine is characterized in that profits given to the player are different between the time saving state and the special time saving state.

(6) In (1) to (5), the displacement member can capture a plurality of game media, can maintain the first state until the plurality of game media are captured, and can capture a plurality of game media. A game machine characterized by being displaced to a second state when a medium is captured.

(7) In (1) to (6), the change time of the identification information due to passage of the game medium into the second start area is set to a short time change, and the identification information that is changing has a high probability of being displayed in a stationary display mode. A game machine characterized by being in the special mode.

(8) In (5), shooting means for shooting game media toward the game area;
and a notification means for notifying various types of information,
The game area has a first area and a second area in which game media can be separately shot by the player's operation of the shooting means,
The first region has the first starting region,
The second region has the passage region and the displacement member,
The notification means, in the time saving state and the special time saving state, performs an effect that prompts to shoot the game medium to the second area, and starts the variation of the identification information that ends the time saving state and the special time saving state A game machine, characterized in that it performs a suggestive performance for prompting the player to shoot a game medium to the first area from the start to the stop.

(9) In (3) or (4), after digesting the change of the identification information specified times in the special time saving state, the stop display mode after the change of the identification information based on the final hold in the holding means , When it is a mode of moving to the second game state and moving to the normal state after the second game state ends, and when it is a mode of not moving to the special game state excluding the special mode, A game machine characterized by shifting to the normal state.

(10) The game machine according to (1) to (9), wherein the displacement member is displaced to the second state when two game media are captured in the first state.

(11) In (1) to (10), the transition to the first game state triggered by the passage of the game medium to the second start region in the normal state, and the special time saving state after the end of the first game state Probability of moving to the special time saving state after passing the game medium to the second start region in the special time saving state to the first game state, and the special time saving state after the end of the first game state A gaming machine characterized by a high

(12) In (1) to (11), the game state control means is characterized in that, when the identification information reaches the number of fluctuations of a predetermined number of times, the game characterized by shifting to the special time saving state machine.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly interesting and advantageous game state function.

[Appendix 2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including:

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state in which the time for variable display of the above symbols is shortened (time-saving state), a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby giving a predetermined profit to the player. A game machine equipped with a game state that is advantageous to play has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-076136).

By the way, there is a demand for higher amusement even in gaming machines equipped with advantageous game state functions.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve such problems and to incorporate a function that shifts to a game state that is advantageous to highly interested players.

(1) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
Identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by fluctuation and stop of identification information;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a displacement member that can be displaced between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture game media;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
a specific passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
The selection area causes a game medium that has passed through the specific passage area to pass through one of a plurality of areas through which game media can pass, including the first start area and the passage area;
The special game state includes a first game state in which a predetermined game capable of giving a profit to the player can be executed, and a second game state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times,
The special game state transition determining means, rather than determining that the transition to the first game state is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the first start region, is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second start region. There is a high probability of determining when moving to 1 game state,
The second starting region enables passage of the game medium when the displacement member catches the game ball,
The displacement member has a displacement pattern in which, when the displacement determining means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state, the first state and the second state are repeated a plurality of times, and then the second state is obtained. and is capable of capturing substantially the same number of game media as the plurality of times while operating in the displacement pattern.

According to (1), in the normal state, the game ball moves to the specific area (croon plate), passes through the passing area, and the displacement determination means (normal drawing lottery) moves the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory) to the second When it is determined to be displaced to one state, the displacement member repeats the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) before entering the second state. Works with a displacement pattern. When the displacement member is in the first state (open state) a plurality of times (for example, 10 times), the game medium passes through the second starting area, triggered by each capture of the game medium. The number of first game states passed by the game medium can be obtained. In this way, by moving the game ball to the specific area (croon dish) and passing through the first start area, in addition to shifting to the special game state (first bonus), the game ball moves to the specific area (croon dish) ) and pass through the passage area, the displacement member continuously moves to the first game state a plurality of times while operating in a long displacement pattern (second bonus). can have In this way, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with a function of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to highly amusing players.

(2) In (1), when the displacement member captures the game medium while operating in the displacement pattern and the game state is shifted to the first game state, the first game state is as follows. A game machine characterized by being executed while the displacement member is in the second state.

(3) In (1) or (2), the selection area includes the first start area, the passage area, and an ejection area leading to a path for ejecting the game medium to the outside of the game board. game machine.

(4) In (1) to (3), it is possible to shift between a first state in which it is easy to catch a game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to catch a game medium, and in the first state, a predetermined plurality of games are played. A gaming machine, further comprising a specific displacement member that displaces the game medium to the second state when the medium is captured and guides the captured game medium to the second starting area.

(5) In (1) to (4), when the special game state transition determination means determines that the transition to the second game state occurs while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the displacement member A gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the second game state is made regardless of the operation state of .

(6) In (1) to (5), when the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area while the identification information display means is displaying the identification information, Further comprising holding means for holding a predetermined number of variable displays of identification information,
When the special game state transition determining means determines that the transition to the second game state occurs while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the variable display of the identification information held in the holding means is , a gaming machine characterized in that it is not executed in said second game state, but is executed after said second game state is completed.

(7) In (1) to (6), while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the special game state transition determination means determines that the transition to the second game state occurs, and the displacement While the member is moving in the displacement pattern, it is better that the determination result of the special game state transition determination means based on the passage of all the game media to the second start area is the transition to the first game state. , a gaming machine characterized in that a large profit is given to a player.

(8) In (1) to (7), the game state control means
The game state after the end of the special game state is a normal state in which the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is switched to the first state with a predetermined probability, and a normal state in which the displacement member in the second state is switched to the first state. Shifting to either a time saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member is switched to the first state in a displacement time with a long time to determine that it is displaced,
A gaming machine, wherein the displacement member operates in the displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state in the normal state.

(9) In (8), when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is displaced to the first state in the time saving state, the displacement member is the first state in the normal state when the opening time is the normal state. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined to be displaced to the 1st state, the displacement pattern is longer than the first state and the number of times of the first state is one.

(10) In (1) to (9), benefits provided to the player by the displacement member operating in the displacement pattern and all the above-mentioned benefits while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern 2 The profit obtained by summing up the profit given to the player when the judgment result of the special game state transition judging means based on the passage of the game medium into the start area is shifted to the first game state is the second game state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the profit is greater than the profit given by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a game state function that is advantageous to highly amusing players.

[Appendix 3]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including:

In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned patterns is shortened (time saving state), a specific result frequently becomes a small hit, so that the player A game machine equipped with an advantageous game state that provides a predetermined profit has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

By the way, there is a demand for higher amusement even in gaming machines equipped with advantageous game states.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of giving new interest to the player in an advantageous gaming state.

(1) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
first identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by passage of the game medium into the first start area by fluctuation and stop of the first identification information;
second identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a displacement member that can be displaced between a first state in which a game medium is easily captured and a second state in which a game medium is difficult to capture, and guides the captured game medium to the second start area;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the displacement determination means by fluctuation and stoppage of the specific identification information;
a game state control means for switching the game state;
with
The stop display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information determined when the special game state transition determining means determines to shift to the special game state is the special game state after the special game state ends. A probability variation hit mode that shifts to a probability variation state in which the probability of determining that the transition determination means shifts to the special game state increases, and after the end of the special game state, the special game state transition determination means determines to shift to the special game state. Including a normal hit mode that transitions to a non-variable state with a low probability of
In the variable probability winning mode and the normal winning mode, after the end of the special game state, the displacement member has a long displacement time for determining that the displacement member in the second state is displaced to the first state by the displacement determination means. A stop mode that shifts to a time-saving state that is easy to determine when switching to the first state, and a displacement time that determines that the displacement determination means displaces the displacement member in the second state to the first state. A game machine characterized by including a stop mode that shifts to a non-time-saving state that is difficult to determine when the member is switched to the first state.

(2) In (1), effect display means for performing various effect displays;
Effect control means for controlling the effect display means to execute various effect displays,
When the first identification information is a stop mode determined by the special game state transition determination means to shift to the special game state, after the special game state ends, the probability variable state and the non-time saving state high probability Non-time saving state and the non-probable variable state and the probability of transitioning to one of the low-probable time-saving state of the time-saving state and the probability of moving to the high-probability non-time-saving state of the non-time-saving state in the non-probable variable state And higher than the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state of the time-saving state,
further comprising counting means for storing a value obtained by summing the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information have changed;
The game state control means, when the value of the count means reaches a specified number of times, determines that the displacement member in the second state is displaced to the first state with a longer displacement pattern than the non-time saving state. to a special time-saving state that makes it easier to select,
The prescribed number of times is the number of times that does not exceed the number of special time reductions granted when the transition to the special time reduction state is performed,
A game machine characterized in that the special time-saving state ends when the value of the counting means after shifting to the special time-saving state reaches a special time-saving number of times.

(3) In (2), the production control means performs a display that suggests that the transition to the special time saving state is approaching, and displays the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time saving state Characteristic game machine.

(4) In (1) to (3), the second identification information fluctuates in the non-variable state and the non-time saving state, and the stop mode when stopped is the non-variable state and In the case of the stop mode to shift to the time saving state, the number of time saving times given to the time saving state is the non-variable state and the first identification information in the non-time saving state fluctuates and stops. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the case of a stop mode of shifting to the time saving state in the non-variable probability state after the end of the special game state, the number of time saving times given to the time saving state is greater than the maximum number.

(5) In (2) to (4), after the special game state ends, after shifting to the variable probability state and to the time saving state, the variable probability state and to the non-time saving state, and then the non-variable state and a game machine characterized by shifting to the special time saving state.

(6) in (2) to (5), when the value of the counting means reaches a specified number of times, switching the table referred to for determining the variation pattern of the identification information for the specified number of times;
The game machine characterized in that the production control means performs control to execute a specific production that notifies the transition to the special time-saving state when shifting to the special time-saving state.

(7) In (2) to (6), when the value of the counting means reaches a specified number of times, the effect control means mixes the reliability of the fluctuation and the transition to the special time saving state. As a notice, it suggests that the transition to the special game state is a change that can be expected, and even if it does not transition to the special game state, it suggests that it is a change that will shift to the special time saving state. A game machine characterized by performing control for executing a performance.

(8) In (2) to (7), while the identification information of at least one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means is being variably displayed, the game medium is Further comprising holding means for holding a predetermined number of variable displays of the identification information when passing through the start region or the second start region,
When the value of the count means reaches a specified number of times in the suspension of the suspension means, the effect control means performs prefetching of the suspension, and adjusts the suspension to reach the specified number of times. A game machine characterized by performing control for executing a countdown effect.

(9) In (2) to (8), the production control means performs control to execute production that notifies the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time saving state only when a specific production is executed Characteristic game machine.

(10) In (2) to (9), the special game state includes a small winning game state in which a predetermined game that can give a profit to the player can be executed, and a plurality of types in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed multiple times. including a jackpot gaming state of
The value of the counting means is reset when shifting to the jackpot gaming state,
The big-hit game state includes a special big-hit game state that performs the same operation as the small-hit game state,
The effect control means is characterized in that, when shifting to the small winning game state and the special big winning game state, it is characterized in that it performs control to execute an effect for informing whether or not the value of the counting means is reset. game machine.

According to the present invention, when shifting to the special game state in the normal state, after the end of the special game state, it shifts to a high probability non-time saving state (latent probability variable state) or a low probability time saving state. Here, in the high-probability non-time-saving state (latency probability variable state), since the displacement means is difficult to be displaced to the first state, the identification information is difficult to change and the transition to the special game state is easy, so the counting means reaches the specified number of times. hard to do On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving state, the identification information is likely to change because the displacement means is likely to be displaced to the first state, and the transition to the special game state is difficult. The possibility of transitioning to a short-time state increases. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of changes in identification information in a short time in an advantageous game state such as a low-probability short-time state, and it is possible to approach the transition to a special short-time state. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of providing a variety of interests.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving new interest to the player in an advantageous gaming state.

[Appendix 4]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including:

In recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above-mentioned patterns is shortened (time saving state), a specific result frequently becomes a small hit, so that the player A game machine equipped with an advantageous game state that provides a predetermined profit has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

However, it is an object of the game machine equipped with the function of the advantageous game state to provide the player with a new interest.

(1) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A jackpot game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into the starting area;
Identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the jackpot game state transition determination means by fluctuation and stop of identification information;
Advantageous game state control means capable of controlling an advantageous game state in which the identification information is easily stopped in a stop mode in which the identification information display means notifies affirmative determination;
a non-advantageous game state control means capable of controlling a non-advantageous game state in which the identification information is difficult to stop in a stop mode in which the identification information display means notifies a positive determination;
counting means for storing the number of changes in the identification information;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a movable displacement member that can be displaced between a first state in which a game medium is easily captured and a second state in which a game medium is difficult to capture, and guides the captured game medium to the start area;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the movable displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information;
effect display means for performing various effect displays;
an effect control means for controlling the effect display means to execute various effect displays;
shooting means for shooting a game medium toward the game area;
with
The advantageous state control means is
After the end of the jackpot game state transferred under the control of the game state control means, the probability variable game controllable to a probability variable game state with a relatively high probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode on the identification information display means a state control means;
After the end of the jackpot game state shifted by the control of the game state control means, non-probable variable game state controllable to a relatively low probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode on the identification information display means Probability variation gaming state control means;
time-saving game state control means capable of controlling a time-saving game state including a state in which the movable displacement member is relatively likely to be in the first state after the end of the jackpot game state shifted by the control of the game state control means; , has
The non-advantageous state control means is
When the number of times the identification information is variably displayed after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means reaches the time-saving number of times, the movable displacement member is relatively difficult to enter the first state. Having a non-time-saving gaming state control means that can be controlled in a non-time-saving gaming state,
The starting region has a first starting region and a second starting region,
The identification information display means is the first identification information for notifying the determination result of whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state triggered by the passage of the game medium into the first starting area by the change and stop of the first identification information. and second identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the jackpot game state triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information. game machine.

(2) In (1), when the number of times that the advantageous game state and the jackpot game state are alternately shifted reaches the limiter number of times, a limiter number control means that shifts to the non-advantageous game state;
The game machine further comprises limiter number setting means for setting the limiter number of times out of a plurality of number of times when the non-advantageous game state is shifted to the jackpot game state.

(3) The gaming machine according to (2), wherein the limiter count setting means sets the limiter count based on the jackpot mode.

(4) In (2) and (3), the effect control means executes a promotion effect to notify the number of limiters after the end of the jackpot game state shifted from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state. A gaming machine characterized by performing control.

(5) In (1) to (4), specific identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the displacement determination means by fluctuation and stop of the specific identification information;
A special time-saving game controllable to a special time-saving state in which the average time for displacing the movable displacement member in the second state to the first state is shorter than the non-time-saving state when the value of the counting means reaches a specified number of times. and a state control means.

(6) In (5), in the jackpot game state, there is a special jackpot game state in which the jackpot game state transitions to the non-probability variable game state and the time-saving game state after the jackpot game state is completed in a short time. included,
The production control means controls the production display means to change and stop the production identification information corresponding to the identification information, and when shifting to the special big hit game state and when shifting to the special time saving state 4. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display a common special pattern as a stop mode of the performance identification information.

(7) In (1) to (6), the first region, the first start region, the second start region, and a movable member that allows game balls to pass through the second start region at regular time intervals A game machine characterized by arranging and.

(8) In (1) to (7), when the game medium passes through either the first start region or the second start region, a small amount that is advantageous to the player and not more advantageous than the big win game state Further comprising a small hit game state transition determination means for determining whether to shift to the hit game state,
The first identification information display means notifies the determination result of the small winning game state triggered by the passage of the game medium to the first start area by fluctuation and stop of the first identification information,
The second identification information display means notifies the determination result of the small hit game state triggered by the passage of the game medium to the second start area by the second identification information display means by the change and stop of the second identification information. inform,
A gaming machine, wherein the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed simultaneously, and the change time of the second identification information is longer than the change time of the first identification information.

(9) In (1) to (7), when the game medium passes through either the first start area or the second start area, a small amount that is advantageous to the player and less advantageous than the big win game state and a small winning game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the winning game state,
Disposing the first starting region in the first region,
disposing the passage area, the movable displacement member, and the second starting area in the second area;
A gaming machine, wherein the second identification information display means displays the stop mode of the second identification information in a small win mode for informing transition to the small win game state with a high probability.

(10) In (5) and (6), the special time-saving state is substantially the same as the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state,
The difference between the number of time reductions granted after shifting from the special time reduction state to the big hit game state and the number of time reductions granted after shifting from the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state to the big hit game state A game machine characterized by having

(11) In (5), (6), and (10), with the passage of the game medium into the starting area as a trigger, is the transition to a small winning game state that is advantageous to the player and less advantageous than the big winning game state? Further includes a small hit game state transition determination means for determining whether or not,
The special time saving state is a plurality of types,
The identification information display means can notify the determination result of the small hit game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium to the start area by fluctuation and stop of the identification information,
A case where the stop mode of the identification information in the specified number of times displayed by the identification information display means is a small win mode informing a transition to the small win game state, and a case where the big win game state and the small win game state are displayed. A game machine characterized in that the special time-saving state after reaching the specified number of times is different in the case of a failure mode in which it is notified that neither transition is made.

(12) In (5), (6), (10) and (11), the gaming machine is characterized in that the counting means does not count in the variable probability gaming state.

(13) In (5), (6), (10) to (12), the identification information display means displays the stop mode of the identification information with a high probability in a jackpot mode for informing transition to a jackpot gaming state. death,
After the jackpot game state is completed, it shifts to either the probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state or the non-probability-variable game state and the time-saving game state, and shifts to the probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state. set at a high percentage,
A game machine, wherein the specified number of times is set to the number of times of time saving given when the game state is shifted to the time saving game state.

According to the present invention, when the number of times the advantageous gaming state (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) and the jackpot gaming state alternately shift reaches the limiter number of times, a non-advantageous gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state or non A limiter number of times is set from among a plurality of number of times when shifting to a time-saving game state and shifting from a non-advantageous game state to a jackpot game state. For this reason, since the number of limiters can be set to two or more types, for example, when the number of times the advantageous gaming state (probability variation gaming state) and the jackpot gaming state alternately shift reaches the limiter number of times, a non-advantageous gaming state When shifting to (time-saving gaming state), it is possible to switch the number of limiters based on the number of changes in the identification information in the non-advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest in the gaming machine provided with the limiter.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest in the gaming machine equipped with the function of the advantageous game state.

[Appendix 5]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and displays symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Also, as advantageous game states, there is a big win game state controlled when a specific result is a big win, and a small win game state controlled when a specific result is a small win, which is less profitable for the player than the big win game state. There are gaming machines with advantageous game states including:

In addition, in recent years, in this type of gaming machine, in a state where the time for variable display of the above symbols is shortened (time saving state), a specific result frequently becomes a small hit. A game machine equipped with an advantageous game state that gives a predetermined profit to a player has appeared (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-76136).

However, even gaming machines equipped with advantageous game states are desired to have higher amusement.

Therefore, the gaming machine described below is intended to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine equipped with a game state function that is highly interesting and advantageous to the player.

(1) a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
first identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by passage of the game medium into the first start area by fluctuation and stop of the first identification information;
second identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information;
a passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a displacement member that can be displaced between a first state in which it is easy to capture game media and a second state in which it is difficult to capture game media;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state when the game medium has passed through the passage area;
specific identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the displacement determination means by fluctuation and stoppage of the specific identification information;
a game state control means for controlling a game state;
effect display means for performing various effect displays;
an effect control means for controlling the effect display means to execute various effect displays;
with
The special game state includes a first game state in which a predetermined game capable of giving a profit to the player can be executed, and a second game state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means performs effect control related to variation of the first identification information in a normal state.

(2) In (1), the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed at the same time,
The game state control means, when a value obtained by summing the number of times of change of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches a specified number of times, has a special game state in which the change time of the specific identification information is shorter than in a normal state. transition to a short-time state,
In the first identification information and the second identification information, the variation time when notifying the first hit determination that does not shift to the special game state and the first hit determination that shifts to the first game state is the second shift to the second game state. 2 It shall be longer than the fluctuation time when notifying the hit judgment,
When one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means stops in the first hit stop mode informing the first hit determination, the other stops in the losing stop mode informing the loss determination. and when one of them stops in a second hit stop mode in which a second win determination is reported, the other is stopped in a miss stop mode in which a miss determination is reported.

(3) In (1) or (2), the effect control means does not perform effects related to the change of the second identification information in a normal state, and does not externally output the number of changes of the second identification information. game machine.

(4) In (1) to (3), the game machine is characterized in that the effect control means performs effect control for displaying the number of times the first identification information has changed on the effect display means.

(5) In (4), the game machine is characterized in that the production control means performs an production that suggests the number of fluctuations until the special time saving state is reached.

(6) In (1) to (5), in the special time saving state, the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed at the same time, and the first identification information and the second identification information A game machine characterized in that one variation is stopped in a first hit stop mode, and the other variation is stopped in a loss stop mode.

(7) In (6), even if the special game state transition determination means corresponding to the other variation is a determination to shift to the second game state, the other variation is stopped in a deviated stop mode. game machine.

(8) In (1) to (7), in the special time saving state, the variation time to be the second hit stop mode is shorter than the variation time to be the off stop mode and the first hit stop mode. game machine.

(9) In (8), for both the first identification information and the second identification information, the fluctuation time for the losing stop mode and the first hit stop mode is shorter than the fluctuation time for the second hit stop mode. Amusement machine.

(10) In (1) to (9), both the first identification information and the second identification information fluctuating at the same time are determined by the special game state transition determining means to transition to the second game state. A game machine characterized in that, when notifying that, the identification information that is to be stopped first in the program regardless of the fluctuation time is stopped in the second win mode.

(11) In (1) to (10), both the first identification information and the second identification information that are fluctuating at the same time are determined by the special game state transition determining means to transition to the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that, when notifying that, the identification information that is to be stopped first in the program regardless of the fluctuation time is stopped in the first win mode.

According to this invention, when the value which totaled the frequency|count of a change of 1st identification information and 2nd identification information reaches|attains the number of times of regulation, it transfers to a special time saving state (ceiling time saving). Here, the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed at the same time, and the fluctuations of the first identification information and the second identification information are digested in parallel, thereby promoting reaching the prescribed number of times. In addition, an effect related to the change of the first identification information is performed in the normal state, and for example, by displaying the number of times the first identification information has changed, it is possible to guess the remaining number of times until reaching the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that realizes a variable number of performance display that is highly interesting to the player.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a game state function that is highly interesting and advantageous to the player.

7, 1007, 2007, 3007, 4007 Display devices 10, 1010, 2010, 3010, 4010 Game board units 106, 1106, 2106, 3106, 4106 Left areas 107, 1107, 2107, 3107, 4107 Right areas 120, 1120, 2120, 3120, 4120 First starting ports 126, 1126, 2126, 3126, 4126 Passing gates 131, 1131, 2131, 3131, 4131 Big prize winning ports 140, 1140, 2140, 3140, 4140 Second starting ports 146, 1146 , 2146, 3146, 4146 Ordinary electric accessories 151, 1151 Small winning prize opening 185 Rotating accessories 201, 1201, 2201, 3201, 4201 Main CPU
163, 1163, 2163, 3163, 4163 First special symbol display portion 164, 1164, 2164, 3164, 4164 Second special symbol display portion 301, 1301, 2301, 3301, 4301 Sub CPU
3124 Creon unit 3210 Creon plate 3220 Normal figure start port 3506 Sorting device 3511 First operating mechanism 3513 Second operating mechanism 3440 First non-electric role item 3441 Second non-electric role item

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area on which game media can roll;
a selection area arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
Identification information display means for notifying the determination result of the special game state transition determination means by fluctuation and stop of identification information;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to the stop display mode of the identification information display means;
a predetermined passage area arranged in the game area through which game media can pass;
a displacement member capable of being displaced between a first state in which guiding of game media is easy and a second state in which guiding of game media is more difficult than in the first state;
displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member in the second state to the first state when the game medium has passed through the predetermined passage area;
a specific passage area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
The selection area is capable of causing a game medium that has passed through the specific passage area to pass through any one of a plurality of areas through which game media pass, including the first start area and the predetermined passage area,
The special game state includes a first game state in which a predetermined game capable of giving a profit to the player can be executed, and a second game state in which the predetermined game can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times,
The special game state transition determining means, rather than determining that the transition to the first game state is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the first start region, is triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second start region. There is a high probability of determining when moving to 1 game state,
The second starting region is capable of allowing a game medium to pass through when the game medium is guided by the displacement member being displaced to the first state ,
The displacement member has one of a plurality of displacement patterns including a predetermined displacement pattern and a specific displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state. can operate with
In the period in which the operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state , and the second state is displaced from the second state to the first state. It is possible to guide game media in substantially the same number as the plurality of times by performing the motion a plurality of times, and it is easier for the game media to pass through the second start region than during the period in which the motion according to the specific displacement pattern is possible,
When the displacement member is in the first state when moving to the second game state while operating in the predetermined displacement pattern, and when the displacement member is in the first state when moving to the second game state, the displacement member is capable of continuing the first state during the second game state,
A game machine characterized in that when the identification information is stopped in a mode of shifting to the second game state triggered by passage of the game medium into the first start area, control is possible so that the pending display is not displayed. .

Images